kia,  the  company
kia, the company
Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment. It
will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner of
a Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your
vehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”, “Who is Kia?”, “What
does ‘Kia’ mean?”.
Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in Korea.
It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on building
high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.
The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to the
world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syllable, a,
means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from” or “to come
up out of Asia to the world.”
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your dealer knows
your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained technicians,
recommended special tools, genuine Kia replacement parts and
is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models.
Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along with
the various illustrations, may not all be applicable to your particular vehicle.
i
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia Dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2007 Kia Motors Crop.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Motors Corporation.
Printed in Korea
table of contents
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Knowing your vehicle
3
Driving your vehicle
4
Driving tips
5
In case of an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications
8
Index
9
ii
1
Introduction
How to use this manual / 1-2
Vehicle break-in process / 1-2
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual.
Especially, in order to minimize the
chance of death or injury, you must read
the WARNING and CAUTION sections
spread throughout the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has nine sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
1 2
You’ll
find
various
WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this manual. These were prepared to enhance your
personal safety. You should carefully read
and follow ALL procedures and recommendations
provided
in
these
WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious bodily injury or death
could result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which personal injury, perhaps
severe, could result if the caution is
ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the notice is ignored.
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
Your vehicle at a glance
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button.....................3-11
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch* ...............................................3-76
3. Power window switches* ...................3-14
4. Master power door lock control* .......3-12
5. Master power window control lock*...3-17
6. Steering wheel ..................................4-16
7. Hood release lever ...........................3-71
8. Trunk release lever* ..........................3-70
9. Fuel filler lid release button...............3-72
* : if equipped
OMG025001
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s air bag ..................................3-51
2. Light control / Turn signals ................4-40
3. Instrument cluster .............................4-24
4. Wiper/Washer....................................4-43
5. Ignition switch....................................4- 2
6. Digital clock .......................................3-89
7. Hazard...............................................4-47
8. Rear window defroster ......................4-46
9. Climate control system .............4-48/4-55
10. Shift lever....................................4-4/4-6
11. Cigar lighter.....................................3-86
12. Passenger’s air bag ........................3-52
13. Glove box ........................................3-85
14. Seat.................................................3-18
15. Audio controls*................................3-94
* : if equipped
OMG025002
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-12
2. Engine oil filler cap............................7-11
3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-14
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-18
5. Fuse box ...........................................6- 8
6. Negative battery terminal ...........6-4/7-21
7. Positive battery terminal .............6-4/7-21
8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick* ................7-16
9. Radiator cap......................................7-13
10. Engine oil dipstick ...........................7-11
11. Power steering fluid reservoir .........7-15
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-17
* : if equipped
OMG077002
2 4
Keys / 3-2
Remote keyless entry / 3-4
Theft-alarm system / 3-6
Immobilizer system / 3-8
Door locks / 3-10
Window / 3-14
Knowing your vehicle
Seat / 3-18
Safety belts / 3-28
Air bags-supplemental restraint system / 3-48
Trunk / 3-69
Hood / 3-71
Fuel filler lid / 3-72
Mirrors / 3-75
Homelink® wireless control system / 3-79
Interior lights / 3-83
Storage compartment / 3-84
Interior features / 3-86
Sunroof / 3-90
Luggage net / 3-92
Antenna / 3-93
Audio remote control / 3-94
Audio system / 3-95
3
Knowing your vehicle
KEYS
WARNING - Ignition key
Key operations
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous even if the key is not in the
ignition. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the ignition. The ignition key would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
(1) Master key
Used to start the engine, lock and
unlock the doors, lock and unlock the
glove box (if equipped), and open the
trunk.
(2) Transmitter (if equipped)
Used to lock and unlock the doors
and trunk.
(3) Sub key (if equipped)
Used only to start the engine and lock
and unlock the door.
Use only Kia original parts for the
ignition key in your vehicle. If an
aftermarket key is used, the ignition
switch may not return to ON after
START. If this happens, the starter
will continue to operate causing
damage to the starter motor and
possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.
1
OMG035108
The key code number is stamped on the
plate attached to the key set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will enable
an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the
keys easily. Remove the plate and store it
in a safe place. Also, record the code
number and keep it in a safe and handy
place, but not in the vehicle. Use only
Kia-approved key blanks.
3 2
2
3
OMG037109
CAUTION
Knowing your vehicle
OMG035003
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot and
valet attendants, the following procedures will ensure that your vehicle’s trunk
and glove box compartment can not be
opened in your absence.
With master and sub key
(if equipped)
1. Open the trunk with the master key.
2. Set the trunk lid lock knob in the trunk
to LOCK ( ) position. In the LOCK
( ) position, the trunk can not be
unlocked with either the trunk release
lever inside the car or trunk open button of the transmitter.
3. Close the glove box, and lock the glove
box using the master key.
4. Leave the attendant with the sub key.
The trunk and glove box are secured
because the sub key only allows
engine start and door lock and unlock.
3 3
Knowing your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
3
2
1
4
(3) Trunk lid open (
, if equipped)
The trunk lid opens if this button is
pressed (more than 1 second).
(4) Alarm (
)
The horn sounds and hazard warning
lights will flash for about 30 seconds if
this button is pressed (more than 0.5
second). To stop the horn and lights,
press any button on the transmitter.
✽ NOTICE
OMG037004
(1) Lock button
(2) Unlock button
(3) Trunk lid open button
(4) Alarm button
(1) Lock (
)
All doors are locked and hazard warning lights flash once if the lock button
is pressed.
(2) Unlock (
)
Driver’s door is unlocked and hazard
warning lights flash twice if the unlock
button is pressed once. All doors are
unlocked if the unlock button is
pressed twice within 4 seconds.
After pressing this button, the
doors will be locked automatically
unless you open them within 30
seconds.
3 4
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia Dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Keep the transmitter away from water
or any liquid. If the keyless entry system
is inoperative due to exposure to water
or liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer vehicle warranty.
Operational distance may vary depending upon the area the transmitter is used
in. For example, if the vehicle is parked
near police stations, government and
public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc., these may interfere with
the signal.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the
device.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Knowing your vehicle
7B070E01NF
HNF2005
Battery replacement
✽ NOTICE
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center
cover.
2. Replace the battery with new one.
When replacing the battery, make sure
the battery positive “+” symbol faces
up as indicated in the illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
The keyless entry system transmitter is
designed to give you years of troublefree use, however it can malfunction if
exposed to moisture or static electricity.
If you are unsure how to use your transmitter or replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
For replacement transmitters, see an
Authorized Kia Dealer for reprogramming.
✽ NOTICE
• Using the wrong battery can cause the
transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to
use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to
heat or sunlight.
HNF2006
3 5
Knowing your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft alarm
stage
Theft alarm system will not operate when
the ignition key is in the ignition switch.
If the lock button on the transmitter is
pressed when the key is not in the ignition and any vehicle door or the trunk is
open, then, the doors will lock but the
theft alarm system will not activate.
However, the theft alarm system will
automatically activate when the open
door(s) or trunk is closed and locked.
3 6
Armed stage
Theft alarm stage
When the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”
position, and key is not in the ignition, the
system will be armed and the hazard
lights will flash once when the following
conditions are met:
• The hood, trunk and doors are all
closed and locked with the transmitter
or ignition key.
• If a door or the trunk is not opened
within approximately 30 seconds after
unlocking with the transmitter, all doors
will be locked again and theft alarm
system armed.
If the “Lock” button pressed for more than
two times within 3 seconds, the horn will
sounds from the second time pressed.
The alarm will activate (horn will sound
and lights flash) when:
• Any door is opened without using the
transmitter or key.
• The trunk lid is opened without using
the key.
• The engine hood is opened.
Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the vehicle.
The alarm will sound ON for 27 seconds,
then OFF for 10 seconds. This ON/OFF
cycle will be repeated three times. During
this time, the engine will not start.
The engine will not start while the
theft-alarm system is armed or activated.You must disarm the theft-alarm
system to start the engine.
Knowing your vehicle
Opening the trunk with the alarm
armed (if equipped)
When the alarm is armed, the alarm will
not sound if the trunk lid is opened with
the key.
However, if the trunk lid is not opened
completely within two seconds after
unlocking with the key, the alarm will
sound.
Also, if any of the doors or hood is
opened while the trunk lid is open and
the alarm armed, the alarm will sound.
Disarmed stage
If the following conditions are met, the
alarm system will be deactivated and the
hazard flasher light will flash twice.
• When the doors are unlocked with the
transmitter or ignition key.
After depressing unlock button, you
must open the doors within 30 seconds
or all doors will automatically lock
again and the theft-alarm system will
be armed.
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The alarm will be deactivated when:
• The lock (
), unlock (
) button on
the transmitter is pressed.
• The doors are unlocked with the ignition key.
• The ignition switch is in the “ON” position for 30 seconds or more.
✽ NOTICE
Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle starting motor is disabled during the theftalarm stage.
3 7
Knowing your vehicle
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key,
and antenna coil in the key cylinder and
ICU (Immobilizer Control Unit) in the
steering shaft.
With this system, whenever you insert
your ignition key into the ignition switch
and turn it to ON, the antenna coil in the
ignition switch receives a signal from the
transponder in the ignition key and then
sends the signal to the ECU (Engine
Control Unit).
The ECU checks the signal whether the
ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
3 8
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the key or ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal from normally
transmitting.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep keys
separate to avoid immobilizer malfunctions.
Limp home (override) procedure
When you turn the ignition key to the ON
position, if the IMMO indicator goes off
after blinking 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of order.
You cannot start the engine without the
lime home procedure. To start the engine,
you have to input your password by using
the ignition switch.
The following procedure is how to input
your password of “2345” as an example.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
The IMMO indicator (
) will blink 5
times and go off indicating the beginning of the limp home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC position.
Knowing your vehicle
3. To enter the first digit (in this example
“2”), turn the ignition key to the ON and
ACC position twice. Perform the same
procedure for the next digits between 3
seconds and 10 seconds (for example,
for “3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC 3
times).
4. If all of the digits have been input successfully, you have to start the engine
within 30 seconds. If you attempt to
start the engine after 30 seconds, the
engine will not start and you will have
to input your password again.
After performing the limp home procedure, you have to see an authorized Kia
dealer immediately to inspect and repair
your ignition key or immobilizer system.
✽ NOTICE
If you cannot start your engine in spite
of limp home procedure, have your vehicle towed by an authorized Kia dealer
for inspection and necessary repairs.
✽ NOTICE
The transponder in your ignition key is
an important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give years of
troublefree service, however you should
avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity
and
rough
handling.
Immobilizer system malfunction could
occur.
✽ NOTICE
Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the
immobilizer system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to
the immobilizer system are not covered
by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the
device.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
3 9
Knowing your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Unlock
Lock
OMG035005
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward rear of vehicle to
unlock and toward front of vehicle to
lock.
• If you lock the door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock automatically (if
equipped).
• Turn the key to the right once to unlock
the driver’s door and to the right twice
within 4 seconds to unlock all doors. (if
equipped)
3 10
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter (if
equipped).
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
firmly by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
OMG035006A
To lock a door without the key, push the
inside central door lock switch (1) to the
“LOCK” position and close the door (2).
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
door is open.
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
✽ NOTICE
If the door is locked/unlocked multiple
times in rapid succession with either the
vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in
order to protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
WARNING - Door lock malUnlock
function
Lock
OMG035007
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button forward to the “Unlock” position
(red mark on button visible).
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) forward to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button will
not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of front door is
pulled when the door lock button is in
lock position, the button is unlocked
and door opens. (if equipped)
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
• Lower the rear seats (if
equipped), move to the cargo
area and open the trunk using the
emergency release handle (if
equipped).
3 11
Knowing your vehicle
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open, the
doors will not lock when the front portion of central door lock switch is
pressed.
Driver’s door
CAUTION - Doors
OMG035008
Passenger’s door (if equipped)
OMG035009
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
• When pushing down on the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
3 12
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock if a collision that warrants SRS air bag deployment is detected when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
However, if the impact causes damage to
the vehicle electrical system or the
mechanical door lock mechanisms, the
impact sensing door unlock system may
not operate.
OMG035010
Rear door child safety lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the “Lock (
)” position, rear door
will not open when the inner door handle is pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
4. To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle.
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (1) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked (
).
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To prevent
children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
3 13
Knowing your vehicle
WINDOWS
Power windows (if equipped)
• Type A
• Type B
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch*
• Power window timer*
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. If the front door
is open, the window will not operate
unless the ignition key is in the ON
position.
* : if equipped
OMG035011
3 14
Knowing your vehicle
Power windows (if equipped)
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls that door’s window.
However, the driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the operation
of passenger windows.
If you notice buffeting and pulsation
(wind shock) with either side window
open, you should open the opposite window slightly to reduce the condition.
✽ NOTICE
• To protect the power window system
from the possibility of damage, do not
open or close two windows at the same
time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main switch
on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposing
directions at the same time. If this is
done, the window will stop and cannot
be opened or closed.
OMG035012
OMG035013
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle. To open or close a
window, press down (5) or pull up (5) the
front portion of the corresponding switch.
Automatic power window
(driver’s window, if equipped)
Type A - Automatic power window down
Depressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
3 15
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
OMG035014
OMG035110
Type B - Automatic power window
(if equipped)
Depressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers or
lifts the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress the switch
momentarily to the opposite direction of
the window movement.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected when the window operating,
the automatic power window system
must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON position.
2. Close each window and continue
pulling up on each power window
switch for at least 1 second after the
window is completely closed.
Automatic window reversal (When window is closed by the automatic power
window)
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 20~30 cm
(8~12 inches) to allow the object to be
cleared.
3 16
• The automatic window reversal
feature (window lowers 20~30 cm
(8~12 inches) cm when a resistance is detected) will only operate when the automatic power
window operation feature is used.
Automatic window reversal will
not operate if the window is
raised using the first detent position (5) on the power window
switch or the window is raised
using the second detent position
(6) on the switch within 2 seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature. Always double check to
make sure all faces, arms, hands
and other obstructions are safely
out of the way of before operating
the power window.
• If an object less than 4 mm
(0.15 inch) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reversal may not detect
the resistance and will not operate. Therefore, always check for
any obstructions before raising
any window.
Knowing your vehicle
CAUTION - Windows
OMG035015
Power window lock switch
(if equipped)
• The driver can disable the power window switches on all passenger doors
by depressing the power window lock
switch located on the driver’s door to
LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock switch
is ON, the driver’s master control
cannot operate the passenger door
power windows.
• Always double-check to make
sure all arms, hands, heads and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a window. Serious injury could occur.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by a child.
• Never extend face or arms outside through the window opening
while driving.
OMG035016
Curtain (if equipped)
Use the rear curtain installed in the rear
package shelf to shield the rear seat from
direct sunlight through the rear window.
Grasp the tab on the end (1) of the curtain and carefully pull it up to hook (2).
3 17
Knowing your vehicle
SEAT
Driver’s seat
(1) Forward / backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat cushion, height*
(4) Seat warmer*
(5) Headrest
Manual Type
Front passenger seat
Manual Type
(6) Forward / backward
(7) Seatback recliner
(8) Seat warmer*
(9) Headrest
Electric type
Rear seat
Electric type
(10) Split folding rear seat*
(11) Armrest*
(12) Headrest
* ; if equipped
OMG035017
3 18
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Loose objects
might interfere with the seat slide
mechanism. Do not place anything
under the front seats.
WARNING - Seating position
In order to avoid unnecessary air
bag injuries including the possibility of severe injury or death, always
sit as far back as possible by moving the seat far back, while still
maintaining good vehicle control.
Serious injury or death may be
caused due to the deployment of
the passenger’s air bag.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat while
the vehicle is moving. This could
result in loss of control, and an
accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright lap portion of
the safety belt is snug and low
across the hips. This puts your
safety belts in the best position to
protect you in case of an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary air
bag injuries including the possibility of severe injury or death,
always sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel so that
your chest is at least 250 mm (10
inches) from the steering wheel.
OMG035018
Front seat adjustment
(Manual type)
Adjusting the seat forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cushion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the control knob. If the seat moves,
it is not locked properly.
3 19
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Driver responsibility for front seat passenger
OMG035019
OMG035020
Adjusting height of the driver’s seat
cushion (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cushion:
• Pivot the lever upward to raise the seat
cushion.
• Pivot the lever downward to lower the
seat cushion.
Adjusting the seatback recliner
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever located on the
outside of the seat, at the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback to the desired
position.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
3 20
Driving or riding in a vehicle with a
front seatback reclined could lead
to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a front seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant’s hips
may slide under the lap portion of
the safety belt applying great force
to the unprotected abdomen or
neck. Serious or fatal internal
injuries could result. The driver
must advise the front passenger to
keep the seatbacks in comfortably
upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Knowing your vehicle
Front seat adjustment
(Electric type, if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
• Power seats are driven by the electric
motor. Stop operating if the adjustment is completed. Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power seats
consume large amount of electrical
power. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, don’t adjust the
power seats longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power seat
control buttons at the same time.
Doing so may result in power seat
motor or electrical component malfunction.
CAUTION - Children
The power seats are operable with
the ignition OFF.
This is another reason children
should never be left unattended in
the car.
OMG035022
OMG035100
Adjusting the seat forward and backward
Push the control button forward or backward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the knob and the seat
will lock in the selected position.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the control knob. If the seat moves,
it is not locked properly.
Adjusting height of the driver’s seat
cushion (if equipped)
Move the front portion of the control knob
up to raise or down to lower the front part
of the seat cushion.
Move the rear portion of the control knob
up to raise or down to lower the rear part
of the seat cushion.
To raise or lower the seat cushion, pull up
or push down on the center of the corresponding switch. Release the knob once
the seat reaches to the desired position.
3 21
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Driver responsibility for front seat passenger
OMG035023
Adjusting the seatback recliner
Move the lever forward or backward to
the desired angle and release the lever. If
the lever is released, seatback will lock in
place. After adjustment, make sure that
the lever has returned to its original
locked position.
3 22
Driving or riding in a vehicle with a
front seatback reclined could lead
to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a front seat is reclined during an accident, the occupant’s hips
may slide under the lap portion of
the safety belt applying great force
to the unprotected abdomen or
neck. Serious or fatal internal
injuries could result. The driver
must advise the front passenger to
keep the seatbacks in comfortably
upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.
OMG035024
Warming the front seat
(if equipped)
The front seats can be electrically heated
individually when the ignition switch is
ON. When the switch is ON, a number
ranging from 1 to 5 is displayed on the
switch (5 = warmest setting).
To turn off the seat warmer, set the
switch to 0.
The seat warmer turns off automatically
when the seat temperature reaches the
selected range and will turn on again if
the temperature drops below the selected range.
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When cleaning the seats, do not use an
organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline. Doing so
may damage the surface of the heater
or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place blankets, cushions or seat covers on the seats while
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp objects
on seats equipped with seat warmers.
Damage to the seat warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use caution
when using seat warmers due to
the possibility of excess heating or
burns. In particular, the driver must
exercise extreme care for the following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or handicapped persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
OMG035025
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and passengers, but also
helps to protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3). For
best protection, adjust the headrest so its
center is as high as your ears. Also
adjust the headrest so its distance from
the head is as wide as your fist.
3 23
Knowing your vehicle
Rear seat
OMG035026
OMG035027
Adjusting forward and backward
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
three different positions by pulling the
headrest forward. To adjust the headrest
backward, pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release lever (1)
while pulling upward (2).
WARNING - Headrest positioning
To reduce the risk of head and neck
injuries, each occupant headrest
must be properly adjusted. Do not
drive the vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly positioned.
Do not adjust the driver's headrest
while driving, or else loss of control
and an accident is possible.
3 24
Split folding rear seat (if equipped)
The rear seatbacks fold forward to provide additional cargo space and to provide access to the cargo area.
• To fold the rear seatback(s) down, pull
the lock release lever, then fold the
seatback forward and down.
• To raise the seatback, lift and push it
firmly until it clicks into place.
• When you return the seatback to its
upright position, reposition the rear
safety belts so that they can be used
by rear seat passengers.
Knowing your vehicle
OMG035030
OMG035045
1. Slide the front seat forward, and move
the seatback to the forward position.
2. Lower the headrest to the lowest position.
3. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the key or similar small rigid
device into the web release button (B)
on the anchor connector. Pull up on
the seat belt web (A) and allow the
webbing to retract automatically. (if
equipped)
OMG035029
4. Open the trunk lid.
5. Pull the lock release lever (1).
OMG035031
6. Fold the seatback forward and down
firmly.
3 25
Knowing your vehicle
(if equipped)
WARNING - Cargo danger
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants.
1
CAUTION - Loading procedure
OMG035033
To unfold the rear seat:
1. Lift and push the seatback backward
firmly until it clicks into place (1).
2. Return the rear safety belt to the proper position.
3 26
OMG035042
CAUTION
• When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position,
remember to return the rear
shoulder belts to their proper
position.
• Do not remove the floor carpet in
your vehicle. Emission control
system components cause high
exhaust temperatures under the
floor.
Make sure the engine is off, the
transaxle is in P (Park) and the
parking brake is applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo. Vehicle
may move if shift lever is inadvertently moved to another position
with the engine on.
✽ NOTICE
Be careful when loading cargo through
the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.
Knowing your vehicle
OMG035035
OMG035036
OMG035037
Armrest (if equipped)
The armrest is located in the center of
the rear seat. Pull the armrest down from
the seatback.
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and passengers, but also
helps to protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3). For
best protection, adjust the headrest so its
center is as high as your ears. Also
adjust the headrest so its distance from
the head is as wide as your fist.
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release lever (1)
while pulling upward (2).
WARNING - Rear headrest
To reduce the risk of head and neck
injuries to rear passengers, do not
operate the vehicle with the rear
headrest removed or improperly
positioned.
3 27
Knowing your vehicle
SAFETY BELTS
OMG035300
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner safety
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that excess slack is taken
up in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioners may activate along with the
front air bags in frontal collisions based
on angle of impact, seat belt usage and
impact severity.
3 28
The pre-tensioner seat belt is
equipped at the front seats, and the
sensor is equipped inside the buckle,
where presence of passenger is
sensed by the fastening of the seat
belts. Therefore, pre-tensioner will not
activate if the passenger is not fastened with the seat belts. Likewise, it
will activate if buckled even without a
passenger in the seat. Pre-tensioner
seat belt is designed to activate when
the seatbelt is in use. To ensure the
pretensioner seatbelts activate in
event of a possible seatbelt buckle
switch malfunction, the system is
designed to activate regardless of
whether a seat belt is in use or if no
seat belt use is detected within 6 seconds of turning the ignition switch
ON.
1
2
4
3
1KMB3311
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration.
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly
(3) SRS air bag control module
(4) Buckle pre-tensioner assembly
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Safety belt
adjustment
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
• The safety belt must be worn correctly.
• The safety belt must be adjusted
to the correct position.
CAUTION - Air bag/Pre-
WARNING - Air bag/pretensioner warning light
If the SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to “ON”, or if it
remains illuminated after approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates
while the vehicle is being driven,
please have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner and air
bag system as soon as possible.
tensioner dust
When the air bags and pre-tensioners are activated, a loud noise may
be heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment. This
dust is not toxic. The dust may
cause skin irritation and should not
be breathed for prolonged periods.
Ventilate the vehicle after impact
and wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident.
WARNING - Replacing
used pre-tensioners
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate once. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. All seat belts, of any
type, should always be replaced
after they have been worn during
a collision.
• Do not attempt to replace the pretensioners yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Hot parts
The pre-tensioner assembies mechanism becomes hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assembly for several minutes after they have been activated.
WARNING - Damaging the
pre-tensioners
• Do not hit or strike the pre-tensioner assemblies, especially
with a tool or heavy object.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioners.
3 29
Knowing your vehicle
Safety belt restraint system
WARNING - Safety belts
To minimize the risk of serious or
fatal injury in an accident, the driver and all passengers should use
the appropriate safety restraints for
their age and size. The presence of
air bags does not change the need
to be properly restrained by a safety belt or size-appropriate child
restraint. In fact, air bags are
designed to work the best when
passengers are correctly restrained
in the vehicle.
• Be sure you are familiar with the
information in this section,
including the information on
infant and child restraints.
• Read the safety warnings on the
sun visors of your vehicle also.
3 30
We strongly recommend that the driver
and all passengers be properly
restrained at all times by using the safety
belts provided with the vehicle. Proper
use of the safety belts decreases the risk
of severe injury or death in accidents or
sudden stops. In most states, and in
Canada, the law requires their use.
All seats have lap/shoulder belts. Inertial
locks in the safety belt retractors allow all
of the lap/shoulder safety belts to remain
unlocked during normal vehicle operation. This allows the occupants some
freedom of movement and increased
comfort while using the safety belts. If a
force is applied to the vehicle, such as a
sudden stop, a sharp turn, or a collision,
the safety belt retractors will automatically lock the safety belts.
Since the inertial locks do not require a
collision in order to lock up, you may
become aware of the safety belts locking
while braking or going around sharp corners.
Always use the rear seat position(s) to
install your child restraint(s).
WARNING - Child restraint
in front seat
Never install a child restraint system in the front passenger position,
as an inflating air bag could cause
serious or fatal injury to a child in
that position.
The rear safety belts use a special autolock feature designed to allow a child
restraint to be used in these positions
without an added locking clip. They normally lock only under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock
mode). However they can be adjusted so
that they remain fixed and locked when a
child restraint system is placed in these
positions. (Use this auto-lock mode only
to secure a child restraint, never for passengers restrained by the safety belts.)
Page 3-43 gives instructions on placing
the safety belt in the auto lock mode.
The drivers safety belt can only operate
in the emergency lock mode.
Knowing your vehicle
Safety belts provide the best restraint
when:
• The seatback is upright.
• The occupant is sitting upright (not
slouched).
• The lap belt is snug across the hips.
• The shoulder belt is snug across the
chest.
• The knees are straight forward.
WARNING - Cargo area
(if equipped)
Passengers should never be
allowed to ride in the cargo area of
a vehicle. No safety belts are provided for the cargo area. Persons
riding in the vehicle without a fastened safety belt are much more
likely to suffer serious bodily injury
or death during an accident.
WARNING - After a collision
• Lap/shoulder belt assemblies
may be stretched or damaged
when subjected to the stress and
forces of a collision.
• The entire restraint system
should be inspected following
any collision. All belts, retractors,
anchors and hardware damaged
by a collision should be replaced
before the vehicle is operated
again.
WARNING - Twisted belts
A twisted or jammed safety belt
cannot restrain you properly. If you
cannot untwist or unjam the safety
belt, have an authorized Kia dealer
service it immediately. Never drive
or ride with a twisted or jammed
safety belt.
WARNING - Belt use
Safety belts must be used correctly
to work properly in an accident.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly that includes a buckle and
tongue designed to be used together.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Failure to heed these warnings and
follow these instructions will
increase the risk and severity of
injuries and the likelihood of death
in an accident.
• Use the shoulder portion of the
safety belt on the outside shoulder only.
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt under the outside arm or behind the back.
• Never swing the safety belt
around your neck to fit over the
inside shoulder.
• Never wear the shoulder portion
of the safety belt across the neck
or face.
• Wear the lap portion as low as
possible. Be sure that the lap belt
fits snugly around the hips.
Never wear a lap portion of a
lap/shoulder belt over your waist;
it should always go over the
stronger area of your hips.
• Never use a single safety belt for
more than one person.
• The front seatbacks should
always remain in a comfortable,
upright position when the vehicle
is moving.
3 31
Knowing your vehicle
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when the key is turned ON or if it is
disconnected after the key is turned ON,
the safety belt warning chime will sound
for approximately 6 seconds. (if equipped)
If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when you drive over 10 km/h, the
safety belt warning light and chime will
activate for six seconds. This cycle will
repeat 11 times with an interval of 24
seconds between cycles.
WARNING - Safety belt
care
• A damaged belt may not give you
the protection you need in an
accident.
• Inspect your safety belts periodically for excessive wear or damage. Pull out each belt fully and
look for fraying, cuts, burns or
other damage. Pull the safety belt
out and let it retract a number of
times. Make sure that the
lap/shoulder belts return smoothly and easily into the retractor.
• Check the latches to make sure
they latch and release without
interference or delay.
• Never close the doors on any part
of the lap or shoulder belt.
• Any belt not in good condition or
in good working order should be
promptly replaced.
CAUTION
Never close the doors on any part
of the lap or shoulder belt. It can
damage the safety belt or buckle
which could increase the risk of
injury in case of an accident.
3 32
1GQA2083
Safety belt warning light and
chime
As a reminder to the driver and passenger, safety belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON.
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when the key is turned ON or if it is
disconnected after the key is turn ON,
the safety belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds.
Knowing your vehicle
OMG035301
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the front lap/shoulder belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out
from the retractor.
OMG035302
OMG035303
3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the
open end of the buckle (2) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating the
belt is locked in the buckle.
4. Position the lap portion (1) of the belt
across your lap as LOW ON THE HIPS
as possible to reduce the risk of sliding
under it during an accident. Adjust the
belt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up on
the shoulder portion (2) of the safety
belt. The belt retractor is designed to
take up excess webbing automatically
and to maintain tension on the belt. For
your safety, do not put any excess
slack into the safety belt at any location.
3 33
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
• The height adjuster must be in
the locked position when the
vehicle is moving.
• The misadjustment of height of
the shoulder belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt
in a crash.
OMG035038
OMG035304
5. Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size. To raise the anchor position,
push the anchor up (1). To lower the
anchor position, press (2) the button
(A) and slide the anchor down (3).
After adjustment, make sure the
anchor is locked in position.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is
too near your neck, you will not be getting
the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it
lies across your chest and midway over
your shoulder nearest the door and not
your neck.
To unfasten the front lap/shoulder
belt:
Press the release button on the buckle
and allow the belt to slowly retract.
3 34
Knowing your vehicle
OMG035302
Rear lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the rear lap/shoulder belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt out.
3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the
open end of the buckle (2) until an
audible “click’’ is heard, indicating the
belt is locked in the buckle.
OMG035303
OMG035304
4. Position the lap portion (1) of the belt
across your lap as LOW ON THE HIPS
as possible to reduce the risk of sliding
under it during an accident. Adjust the
belt to a SNUG FIT by pulling up on
the shoulder portion (2) of the safety
belt. The belt retractor is designed to
take up excess webbing automatically
and to maintain tension on the belt. For
your safety do not put any excess
slack into the safety belt.
To unfasten the rear lap/shoulder belt:
Press the release button on the buckle
and allow the belt to slowly retract.
3 35
Knowing your vehicle
(if equipped)
OMG035042
✽ NOTICE
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position. Routing the safety belt
webbing through the rear safety belt
guides will help keep the belts from
being trapped behind or under the seats.
3 36
OMG035041
3 Point rear center belt
(if equipped)
To fasten the rear center belt
1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
open end of the anchor connector (B)
until an audible “click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure
the belt is not twisted.
OMG035043
2. Pull the tongue plate (C) and insert the
tongue plate (C) into the open end of
the buckle (D) until an audible “click” is
heard, indicating the latch is locked.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.
Knowing your vehicle
There will be an audible “click” when the
tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.
If you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you
move around. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position. It
will also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
WARNING
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all tongue plates
and buckle/anchor connector. If any
tongue plate or buckle/anchor connector is not locked, it will increase
the chance of injury or death in the
event of collision.
WARNING - Lock center
rear seat
OMG035039
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
• When using the rear center belt,
you must lock all tongue plates
and buckles prior to use. If any
tongue plate or buckle is not
locked, it will increase the chance
of injury or death in the event of
collision.
• The rear center seatbelt tongue
plate (A) and anchor connector
(B) should remain locked at all
times. They should only be
unlocked when folding the rear
seatback down or when carrying
an object in the rear seat that
could cause damage to the seatbelt webbing or locking devices.
In either case, lock the tongue
plate (A) and anchor connector
(B) immediately after unfolding
the seatbacks or removing the
object being transported.
3 37
Knowing your vehicle
Proper use and care of the safety
belt system
OMG035044
OMG035045H
To unfasten the rear center belt
1. Press the release button on the buckle
(D) and remove the tongue plate (C)
from the buckle (D).
2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the key or similar small rigid
device into the web release button (B)
on the anchor connector. Pull up on
the seat belt web (A) and allow the
webbing to retract automatically. (if
equipped)
3 38
To ensure that the safety belts provide
the maximum protection, please follow
these instructions:
• Use the belts at all times - even on
short trips.
• If the safety belt is twisted, straighten it
prior to use.
• Keep sharp edges and damaging
objects away from the belts.
• Periodically inspect belt webbing,
anchors, buckles and all other parts for
signs of wear and damage. Replace
damaged, excessively worn or questionable parts immediately.
• To clean the belt webbing, use a mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Follow the
instructions provided with the soap.
• Do not make modifications or additions
to the safety belt.
• After wearing a safety belt, make sure
it fully retracts to the stowed position.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in
the door when you close it.
Knowing your vehicle
Restraint of pregnant women
WARNING - Belt cleaning
Do not bleach or dye the webbing
because this may weaken the webbing fibers and allow them to fail
when loaded in a collision.
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen where
the fetus is located or above the
abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
Restraint of infants and small
children
To increase their safety, infants and
young children should always be
restrained by a restraint system
approved for their age and size.
Never allow a child to stand or kneel on
the seat of a moving vehicle. Never allow
a safety belt to be placed around both a
child and an adult or around two children
at the same time.
It is best for children to be seated in the
rear seats.
Many companies manufacture child
restraint systems (often called child
seats) for infants and small children. An
acceptable child restraint system must
always satisfy Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards and your applicable
state laws. Make sure that any childrestraint system you use in your vehicle
is labelled as complying with Federal
Safety Standards.
The child-restraint system should be
chosen to fit both the size of the child and
the size of the vehicle seat. Be sure to follow any instructions provided by the
child-restraint system manufacturer
when installing the child-restraint system.
3 39
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Children on
laps
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms in a moving vehicle.
Even a very strong person cannot
hold onto a child in the event of
even a minor collision.
CAUTION - Hot metal parts
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been
closed during warm/hot weather;
they could burn a child. Check
seats, seatbelt webbing and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
3 40
WARNING - Infants and
young children
• Infants and young children are at
much greater risk of serious
injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop if they are unrestrained or restrained improperly.
Follow all instructions in this section and the instructions that
came with an approved child
safety system. The child restraint
must be correctly installed in the
vehicle, and the child must be
correctly placed in the child
restraint.
• All children under 12 are safest in
the back seat.
• Never install a rear facing infant
seat in the front passenger position. The baby will be injured or
killed by the air bag if it deploys.
• Never allow a child to stand or
kneel on the seat of a moving
vehicle.
Restraint of larger children
As children grow, they may need to use
new child-restraint systems, including
larger child seats or booster seats, which
are appropriate for their increased size.
A child who has outgrown available childrestraint systems should use the belts
provided in the vehicle. When seated in
the rear outboard seats, the child should
be restrained by the lap/shoulder belt.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system. In addition, aftermarket devices are available from independent manufacturers which help pull
the shoulder belt down and away from
the child’s face or neck.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in motion.
• If safety belts are not properly
worn and adjusted, there is a risk
of death or serious injury to such
a child.
Knowing your vehicle
Child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is strongly recommended and is required by law in
almost all states. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Children riding in the car should sit on
the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury
in an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat.
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car and
seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the child
seat manufacturer when installing the
child restraint system.
1JBH3051
WARNING - Child
restraints
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger’s seat.
Should an accident occur and
cause the passenger air bag to
deploy, it could severely injure or
kill an infant or child seated in the
front seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Since a safety belt or child
restraint system can become very
hot if it is in a closed vehicle, be
sure to check the seat cover and
buckles before placing a child
there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the trunk
or fasten it with a safety belt so
that it will not be thrown forward
in the case of a sudden stop or an
accident.
• Children who are too large to be
in a child restraint should sit in
the rear seat and be restrained
with the available lap/shoulder
belts.
• When
using
the
vehicles
lap/shoulder safety belts, always
make sure that the shoulder belt
portion is positioned midway over
the shoulder, never across the
neck or behind the back. The lap
belt portion of the lap/shoulder
belt must always be positioned as
low as possible on the child's hips
and as snug as possible.
(Continued)
3 41
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the vehicle’s safety belt will not
properly fit the child, you must
use an appropriate child restraint
or booster seat in the rear.
• Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel while the vehicle is moving.
• Never use an infant carrier or
child seat that "hooks" over a
seatback. It will not provide adequate protection in an accident.
• Never allow a child to be held
while they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious
injury or death to the child in the
event of an accident or sudden
stop. Holding a child in a moving
vehicle does not provide the child
with any protection during an
accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat
belt.
3 42
Installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat,
because of the danger that an inflating passenger side air bag could
impact the rear-facing child restraint
and kill the child.
Since all passenger safety belts move
freely under normal conditions and only
lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must
manually change these safety belts to
the auto lock mode to secure a child
restraint.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Before installing the child
restraint system, read the instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the safety belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized Kia dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instructions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury or death in an accident.
Knowing your vehicle
Placing a passenger safety belt
into the auto lock mode
The use of the auto lock mode will
ensure that the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle does not cause the
safety belt to be pulled out and loosen
the firmness of its hold on the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following procedure.
E2MS103005
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the safety belt
webbing is not twisted.
E2BLD310
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3 43
Knowing your vehicle
"Click"
MMSA3028
MMSA3029
MMSA3030
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the safety
belt all the way out. When the shoulder
portion of the safety belt is fully
extended, it will shift the retractor to
the “Auto Lock” (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the safety belt to retract and listen for
an audible “clicking” or “ratcheting”
sound. This indicates that the retractor
is in the “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the safety belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the safety belt and repeat
steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the safety belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then
pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the
restraint and allow the safety belt to
retract fully.
3 44
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is
installed.
If the safety belt is not placed in the
“Auto lock” mode, severe injury or
death could occur to the child
and/or other occupants in the vehicle in a collision, since the child
restraint will not be effectively held
in place.
When the safety belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch
from the “Auto Lock” mode to the
emergency lock mode for normal
adult usage.
OMG035229N
2GHA3300
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the shelf behind the rear seats.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on the
shelf behind the rear seats.
2. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
corresponding hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
If the tether strap is secured incorrectly, the child restraint seat may not
be restrained properly in the event of
a collision. Do not mount more than
one child restraint seat to a tether
anchorage, since the anchorage can
then fail in a collision.
3 45
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint system is secured by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or come away
causing death or injury.
WARNING - Child restraint
anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
3 46
1JBA3157
OMG035046N
Child seat lower anchors
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
International Standards Organization
Fixed (ISOFIX) or ISOFIX-compatible
child restraint seats. These seats include
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two ISOFIX
anchors at specific seating positions in
your vehicle. This type of child restraint
seat eliminates the need to use seat
belts to attach the child seat in the rear
seats.
There is a child restraint symbol located
on the lower portion of each side of the
rear seatbacks. These symbols indicate
the position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Knowing your vehicle
Once you have installed the ISOFIX child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the ISOFIX and tether
anchors. Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt the
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the
seat forward. Check to see if the anchors
hold the seat in place.
WARNING
When using the vehicle's "ISOFIX"
system to install a child restraint
system in the rear seat, all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt buckles
and the seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child restraint
to prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted seat
belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the child
in the child restraint.
WARNING - ISOFIX
Anchors
OMG035046
ISOFIX anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
ISOFIX anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The ISOFIX anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard
seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible attachments.
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.
WARNING - ISOFIX lower
anchors
ISOFIX lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions. Never
attempt to attach an ISOFIX
equipped seat in the center seating
position. You may damage the
anchors or the anchors may fail and
break in a collision.
3 47
Knowing your vehicle
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
(1) Driver’s air bag
(2) Front passenger’s air bag
(3) Side air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) SRS Control Module
(6) Side impact sensor*
(7) Front impact sensor*
(8) Front seat position sensor
(9) Occupant classification system
* : if equipped
5
6
7
8
9
1JBN3511A/OMGA035047/OMGA035048/OMG037049/OMGA035051/OMGA035052/OMGA035053/OMGA035055/OMGA035054/1LDN2166/1LDN2167/1LDN2168
3 48
Knowing your vehicle
What your air bag system does
Driver’s air bag and front passenger’s air
bag are designed to supplement the protection offered by the safety belt in certain frontal collisions. Likewise, side air
bags and curtain air bags are designed
to supplement the protection offered by
the safety belt in side collisions. Safety
belts are designed to reduce the injury of
the driver or passengers in case of light
impact or collision. However, to help
reduce impact on driver or passengers in
a serious collision, seat belts must also
be worn correctly.
What your air bag system does
not do
The air bag system is designed to supplement the protection offered by the
safety belt system. IT IS NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR THE SAFETY BELT.
The importance of using
safety belts
There are four very important reasons to
use safety belts even with an air bag supplemental restraint system. They:
• help keep you in the proper position
(away from the air bag) when it inflates.
• reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side
impact (vehicles not equipped with
side and curtain air bags) or rear
impact collisions, because an air bag is
not designed to inflate in such situations and even a side curtain air bag is
designed to inflate only in certain side
impact collisions.
• reduce the risk of harm in frontal or
side collisions which are not severe
enough to actuate the air bag supplemental restraint system.
• reduce the risk of being ejected from
your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s Supplemental Restraint
System Control Module is equipped
with a recording device that may
record the use or status of the safety
belt restraint system by the driver and
front passenger in certain collisions.
WARNING - Air bags &
safety belts
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk
and severity of injury in the event
of a collision or rollover.
• Always wear your safety belt. It
can help keep you away from the
air bags during heavy braking
just before a collision. It may also
reduce the risk of occupant ejection.
• If occupants are not wearing safety belts or correctly seated, they
cannot be fully protected, and
thus face a greater risk of serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
3 49
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• Driver’s and front passenger’s air
bag are designed to inflate only in
certain frontal collisions, and side
and curtain air bags are designed
to inflate in certain side impacts.
Frontal air bags are not designed
to provide protection in side
impacts, rear impacts, rollovers,
or less severe frontal collisions.
They will not provide protection
from later impacts in a multiimpact collision.
• If your vehicle has been subjected to flood conditions (e.g.
soaked carpeting/standing water
on the floor of the vehicle, etc.) or
if your vehicle has become flood
damaged in any way, do not
attempt to start the vehicle or put
the key in the ignition. Have the
vehicle towed to an authorized
Kia dealer for inspection and necessary repairs.
Disregarding this precaution may
cause an unexpected air bag
deployment, which could result in
serious personal injury or death.
3 50
Air bag system components
The main components of your SRS are:
• To indicate that your vehicle is
equipped with air bags, the corresponding air bag covers are marked with
“SRS AIR BAG”.
- Driver’s air bag
- Front passenger’s air bag
- Side air bag (if equipped)
- Curtain air bag (if equipped)
• A diagnostic system that continually
monitors the system operation.
• Air bag warning light to warn you of a
possible problem with the system.
• Emergency power backup in case your
car’s electrical system is disconnected
in a crash.
The SRS uses a collection of sensors to
gather information about the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat position, the driver’s and front passenger’s safety belt
usage and impact severity.
The driver's and front passenger's seat
position sensors, which are installed on
the seat track let the air bag control module know where the seats are positioned.
Similarly, the safety belt usage sensors
measure if the driver and front passenger’s safety belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control the
SRS deployment based on how close the
driver’s seat is to the steering wheel, how
close the passenger’s seat is to the
instrument panel, whether or not the
safety belts are fastened, and the severity of the impact.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating
position and safety belt usage, the SRS
Control Module controls the air bag inflation.
Failure to properly wear safety belts
can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
Knowing your vehicle
Additionally, your SRS is equipped with
an occupant classification system in the
front passenger’s seat. The occupant
classification system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger’s seat and will turn off the front passenger’s air bag under certain conditions
in order to protect smaller front passenger seat occupants. For more detail, see
“Occupant Classification System” later in
this section.
WARNING - Seating sensors malfunction
If the seat position sensor is not
working properly, the air bag warnAIR
ing light ( BAG
) on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the air
bag warning light is connected with
the seat position sensor. If the air
bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned
to the "ON" position, if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
Kia dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
WARNING - Seat usage
• Modification to the seat structure
can damage the seat position
sensor and cause the air bag to
deploy at a different level than
should be provided.
• Do not place any objects underneath the front seats since they
could damage the seat position
sensor or interfere with the occupant classification system.
• Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the
front seat. These may cause a
malfunction of the seat position
sensor.
• Have your car checked by a Kia
dealer as soon as possible if the
SRS warning light comes on.
Ignoring the indicator light can
result in serious or fatal injury.
• Sitting improperly or out of position can provide incorrect data to
the occupant classification system and result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright in their seats
with their feet on the floor.
OMGA035047
HLZ2120
Driver’s air bag
The driver’s air bag is stored in the center of the steering wheel.
3 51
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Steering
wheel
• You must always sit as far back
from the steering wheel air bag as
possible (chest at least 250 mm
(10 inches) away from the steering wheel), while still maintaining
a comfortable seating position for
good vehicle control, in order to
reduce the risk of injury or death
in a collision.
• Never place objects over the air
bag storage compartments or
between the air bags and yourself. Due to the speed and force of
the air bag inflation, such objects
could hit your body at high speed
and cause severe bodily injury
and even death.
• Do not put stickers or ornaments
on the steering wheel cover.
These may interfere with the
deployment of the air bag.
OMGA035048
1LDN2166
HLZ2121
Front passenger’s air bag
Front passenger’s air bag is stored in the
instrument panel on the glove box.
Never put any objects or ornaments on
the instrument panel.
3 52
Occupant classification system
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger in
the front passenger’s seat and will turn
off the front passenger’s air bag under
certain conditions.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger’s air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
Knowing your vehicle
Main components of occupant
classification system
OMG035090N
If there is no passenger in the front passenger seat or if the passenger in the
front passenger's seat is very small (such
as a child), the front PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator may go ON.
When this indicator is ON, the front passenger's air bag will not deploy.
The side air bag will not deploy if the front
seat is unoccupied.
The side air bag may deploy if the front
seat is occupied by a small occupant.
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag systems
(both front and side) should be activated or deactivated.
• A warning light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicating the front passenger air bag
system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occupant classification system.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which can
defeat the detection system. These
include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front
of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which
reduce the passenger weight on the
front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
3 53
Knowing your vehicle
• The “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator illuminates after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position or
after the engine is started. If the front
passenger's seat is occupied by a very
small person, the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” indicator will remain illuminated and the front passenger air bag
will not deploy in frontal crashes. If the
front passenger’s seat is occupied by
an adult size person seated properly,
the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator will turn off after approximately 4
seconds and the front passenger's air
bag will deploy in frontal crashes.
• If the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, the “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” indicator will turn on, and the
front passenger's air bag will not
deploy in frontal crashes.
• If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator illuminates, the front passenger’s air bag will not deploy in frontal
crashes.
• If the front passenger’s seat is occupied by an adult size person seated
properly, the “PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF” indicator is not illuminated and
the front passenger’s air bag will
deploy in frontal crashes.
3 54
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by
the occupant classifi"PASSENGER AIR
cation system
BAG OFF" indicator light Air bag warning light
1. Adult *1
2. Child *2
3. Unoccupied
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Devices
Front passenger air
bag
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
*1 The system detects a person who is generally of adult size as an adult, thus allowing the passenger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system
may detect as a child depending on his/her physique and sitting posture thus preventing air
bag deployment.
*2 When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat,
the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique sitting position,
or objects in the lap of the occupant, thus permitting air bag deployment.
CAUTION
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates or blinks continuously when a person of adult size sits in the front passenger's seat, it could
be because that person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn
the vehicle off, make sure the seat back is not reclined, have the passenger
center on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended, and the safety
belt properly positioned. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position long enough to allow the system to detect the person and activate the passenger air bag.
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Children in rear
seat
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant classification system, children aged 12
and under should be seated in the
rear seats. Do not install a child
restraint system in the front passenger’s seat since a child restraint
may result in an improper reading
by the occupant classification sensor. The infant/child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an accident.
Children are afforded the most protection in the event of an accident
when they are restrained by the
proper restraint system in the rear
seat.
CAUTION
If the occupant classification system is not working properly, the air
AIR
bag warning light ( BAG
) on the
instrument panel will illuminate
because the passenger’s air bag is
connected with the occupant classification system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant classification system, the "Passenger Air bag
Off" indicator will not illuminate and
the front passenger's air bag will
deploy in frontal crashes even if
there is child or no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
Have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the occupant classification
system with the SRS air bag system
as soon as possible if any of following occur;
• The SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to "ON" position.
• The SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated after illuminating or blinking for approximately 6 seconds.
• The SRS air bag warning light illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven.
WARNING
• The occupant classification system can function only when the
ignition key is in the "ON" position.
• If a very low weight adult is seated in the front passenger seat, the
occupant classification system
may or may not turn off the right
front passenger air bag, depending upon the person's seating
position and body type. Everyone
in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether or
not there is an air bag for that person.
• If the front seat passenger
changes their seating position
(for example, by not sitting
upright, by sitting on the edge of
the seat, or by otherwise being
out of position), the "Passenger
Air bag Off" indicator may be
turned on, and the passenger's air
bag may not deploy in a collision.
Always be sure to sit properly in
the front passenger’s seat and
wear the safety belt properly and
do not do any of the following.
(Continued)
3 55
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
1KMN3661
1KMN3663
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
1KMN3665
- Never place feet on the dashboard.
1KMN3662
1KMN3664
1KMN3666
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
(Continued)
- Never lean on the center console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
(Continued)
- Always sit in a proper seating position.
(Continued)
3 56
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• Kia does not endorse nor will it
support any changes to any part
or structure of the vehicle that
could affect the advanced air bag
system, including the occupant
classification system.
Specifically, the front passenger
seat, dashboard or door should
not be replaced except by an
authorized Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this
vehicle and model. Any other
such replacement or modification
could adversely affect the operation of the occupant classification
system and your advanced air
bags.
For the same reason, do not
attach anything to the seat, dashboard or door, even temporarily. If
the system is adversely affected,
it could cause severe personal
injuries or death in a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place sharp objects on the
front passenger seat. These can
damage the occupant classification system, if they puncture the
seat cushion.
• Do not install accessory seat covers on the front seats, since these
will interfere with proper sensor
operation.
✽ NOTICE
• If luggage or other objects are placed
on the front passenger's seat or if the
temperature of the seat changes while
the seat is unoccupied, the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may
blink. These conditions do not indicate a problem.
• Do not put heavy objects on the front
passenger's seat. This may cause front
passenger air bag deployment in the
event of an accident, thus increasing
your repair costs.
WARNING
• The front seat passenger’s air bag
is much larger than the steering
wheel air bag and inflates with
considerably more force. It can
seriously hurt or kill a passenger
who is not in the proper position
and wearing the safety belt properly. The
front
passengers
should always move their seat as
far back as practical and sit back
in their seat.
• It is essential that the front passengers always wear their safety
belts when vehicle is in motion,
even when the vehicle is moving
in a parking lot or up a driveway
into garage.
• If the driver brakes the vehicle
heavily in urgent situations, occupants will be thrown forward. If
front passengers are not wearing
the safety belts, they will be
directly in front of the air bags
when inflation occurs. In that situation, severe injury or death is
possible.
(Continued)
3 57
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• Never allow front passengers to
put their hands, feet or face on or
close to the instrument panel. In
the event of air bag deployment,
such a mispositioned occupant
would be likely to suffer severe
injury or death.
• Never allow children, pregnant
women or weak persons to sit in
the front passenger seat. They
may be seriously injured by the
air bag inflation when air bag
deploys.
• Do not use child restraint systems on the front passenger's
seat, as inflation may cause death
or severe personal injury.
• Do not put objects or stickers on
the instrument panel. Do not
apply any accessory on the front
windshield glass and do not
install aftermarket mirrors or
accessories on the factory
installed rearview mirror. Any of
these could interfere with the
deployment of air bag inflation or
could hit your body at high speed
and cause severe bodily injury
and even death.
3 58
WARNING - Seat covers,
damage and modifications
OMG037049/OMG037050
1JBA3901
Side air bag (if equipped)
Side air bags are stored in the left side of
the driver’s seat and right side of the front
passenger’s seat.
If air bag inflation conditions are met
(side collision), they will inflate.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers for a vehicle equipped
with side air bags.
Use of seat covers could interfere
with side air bag deployment.
If seat is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. Inform
them that your vehicle is
equipped with side air bags and
an occupant detection system.
• Do not make modifications or
additions to the seats as they may
cause the air bag system to malfunction resulting in severe personal injury or death.
Knowing your vehicle
• The side air bags (side and/or curtain
air bags) are not designed to deploy in
collisions from the front or rear of the
vehicle or in most rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only in certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and impact.
OMG035051
1JBA3900
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and the
rear outboard seat occupants in certain
side impact collisions.
• The curtain air bag deployment occurs
only on the side of the vehicle affected
by the impact.
WARNING
• In order for side air bags (side
and curtain air bags) to provide
its best protection, both front seat
occupants and both outboard
rear occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts
properly
fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to put
the child restraint system as far
away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint
system in a locked position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side air
bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• If a small child is seated on the
rear outboard seat cushion, it is
probable that they will below the
deployment level of the side curtain air bag and thus not protected by that air bag.
Failure to follow the above mentioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occupants in an accident.
3 59
Knowing your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision?
(Inflation and non-inflation conditions
of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which one or more of the air bags
would not be expected to provide
additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.
Just because your vehicle is damaged
and even if it is totally unusable, don’t
be surprised that the air bags did not
inflate.
1
3
2
1JBA3512A/OMG035052/OMG035054/OMG035053/OMG035055
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor (if equipped)
3 60
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Protecting air
bag module and sensors
• Do not hit or allow any heavy
objects to hit the locations where
air bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause damage and
unexpected air bag deployment,
which could result in severe personal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Body changes
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of front
bumper, body or B pillar where
side collision sensors are
installed. In the event of a collision, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing aftermarket bumper
guards or replacing a bumper
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicles
collision and air bag deployment
performance.
1JBA3513
Air bag inflation condition
Front air bag
Front air bags (driver’s and front passenger’s air bags) are designed to inflate
when the impact is delivered to front collision sensors depending on the intensity,
speed or angles of impact of the front
collision - generally from an area a little
to the left to a little to the right of straight
ahead.
3 61
Knowing your vehicle
1JBA3514
1JBA3900
Side air bags (if equipped)
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact of side impact of side
impact collision or rollover.
3 62
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collision, it may
inflate in any collision if front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side air
bags (side and/or curtain air bags) are
designed to inflate only in side impact
collision, it may inflate in any collision if
side impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
To protect occupants, front air bags and
pre-tensioner seat belts may deploy in
certain side impact collisions.
1JBA3515
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because the risk of injuries which can
be caused by the air bags exceeds the
benefits they provide in protecting
occupants.
Knowing your vehicle
1JBB3520
1JBA3516
1JBA3521
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, the air
bags do not provide protection.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collision, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment does not provide occupant
protection.
However, side or curtain air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehicle speed and angles of impact.
• In a slant or angled collision, the force
of impact may direct the occupants in a
direction between the front and side air
bags, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
3 63
Knowing your vehicle
1JBA3517
1JBA3522
1JBA3518
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be significantly altered by such “under-ride” collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment
would not provide proper protection to
the occupants.
However, side air bags may inflate
when the vehicle is rolled over by a
side impact collision, if the vehicle is
equipped with side air bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not transmitted to the sensors.
3 64
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag system operation
• Air bags only operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
positions.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side air bag or curtain
air bag) in order to help protect the
occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single vehicle speed at
which the air bags will inflate.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. However, factors are not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is impossible for you to see the air
bags inflate during an accident. It is
much more likely that you will simply
see the deflated air bags hanging out
of their storage compartments after the
collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises and
broken bones, and sometimes more
serious injuries because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Seated
positioning
• To avoid severe personal injury or
death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible
(at least 250 mm (10 inches) away).
The front passenger should
always move their seat as far back
as possible and sit back in their
seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries which normally include
facial or bodily abrasions, injuries
by the broken glasses or burns by
the explosives.
3 65
Knowing your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal. After the air bag inflates,
you may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing due to the contact of your
chest to both the safety belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the smoke
and powder. We strongly urge you to
open your doors and/or windows as
soon as possible after impact in order
to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and
powder.
Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat etc.). Wash and
rinse with cold water immediately and
consult a doctor if symptoms persist.
3 66
WARNING - Hot air bag
parts
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in steering wheel
and/or instrument panel and/or in
both sides of the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are very
hot. To prevent injury, do not touch
the air bag storage area’s internal
components immediately after an
air bag has inflated.
1JBH3051
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger seat is extremely
dangerous and should never be
done.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing severe or fatal
injuries.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it may cause severe or fatal
injuries to the child.
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag (Supplemental Restraint
System) service
WARNING - Children
• Never put a child in the front passenger seat, even if they are in a
child restraint. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it may cause
severe or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats in which curtain air bags are equipped, be
sure to put the child restraint system as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system to be
locked in position.
AIR
BAG
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light in
your instrument panel is to alert you of a
potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light should blink or illuminate for approximately 6 seconds, then
go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after the engine
starts.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
Your Supplemental Restraint System is
virtually maintenance-free. There are no
parts which you can service.
You must have the system serviced
under the following circumstances:
• If an air bag ever inflates, the air bag
must be replaced. Do not try to remove
or discard the air bag by yourself. This
must be done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• If the air bag warning indicator light
alerts you to a problem, have the air
bag system checked as soon as possible. Otherwise, your air bag system
may be ineffective.
CAUTION - No modification
Do not modify any part of the air
bag system. Modification could
make the air bag system ineffective
or could cause unnecessary
deployment.
3 67
Knowing your vehicle
Repairing or scrapping the vehicle
• Repairing/replacing the steering
wheel, instrument panel, center console headliner/pillar trim, or modifying
vehicle sheet metal components could
disable the air bag system. Have such
repairs and maintenance performed by
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Special care must be taken in scrapping or junking an air bag-equipped
vehicle. Always refer such activities to
a qualified professional.
WARNING - No maintenance or repair
• Do not work on the air bag system’s components or wiring. This
could cause the air bags to inflate
inadvertently, possibly seriously
injuring someone. Working on the
system could also disable the
system so that the air bags would
not deploy in a collision.
• Any work on the air bag system,
such as removing, installing, or
repairing the steering wheel must
be performed by a qualified Kia
technician. Improper handling of
the air bag system including the
steering wheel may result in serious personal injury or death.
3 68
1
2 (if equipped)
7JBN3519/1MGA3055/OMG035103
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels are attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk of
air bag system.
Knowing your vehicle
TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
OMG035060N
Outside the vehicle
• To open the trunk, insert the key into
the lock and turn it to the right (clockwise).
• To close the trunk, use both hands to
push the trunk lid down. Check to see
if the trunk is completely shut.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
OMG035061
Trunk room lamp
Trunk room lamp turns on when the trunk
is opened. It remains on until the trunk is
securely closed.
✽ NOTICE
Make sure to close the trunk securely. If
it remains open while engine is not running, it may cause battery discharge
because trunk room lamp remains on.
3 69
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
OMG035062
Inside the vehicle
To open the trunk from inside the vehicle,
pull the trunk lid release lever.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the trunk lid open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle causing
serious injury or death to vehicle
occupants. Open trunk lids can also
dangerously obscure rear view
vision.
If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, keep the air vents open so
that additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
3 70
OMG035063
Emergency trunk safety release
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release cable located inside
the trunk. The lever glows in the dark
when the trunk lid is closed. If someone
is inadvertently locked in the trunk,
pulling this handle will release the trunk
latch mechanism and open the trunk.
No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk of the vehicle at any
time. If the trunk is partially or totally latched and the person is unable
to get out, severe injury or death
could occur due to lack of ventilation, exhaust fumes and rapid heat
build-up, or because of exposure to
cold weather conditions. The trunk
is also a highly dangerous location
in the event of a crash because it is
not a protected occupant space but
merely a part of the vehicle’s crush
zone.
CAUTION
• If a person is locked in the trunk,
they can pull the emergency
release to open the trunk lid.
• We recommend that cars be kept
locked and keys be kept out of
the reach of children, and that
parents teach their children about
the dangers of playing in trunks.
Knowing your vehicle
HOOD
OMG035064
OMG035065
Trunk lid lock knob (if equipped)
Opening the hood:
If the trunk lid lock knob (located near the
latch) is in the “LOCK (
)” position
when the trunk lid is closed, it will not be
possible to open the trunk lid by using the
remote release. In this instance, use the
master key to unlock and open the trunk
lid. To allow the trunk lid to be opened
with the remote release, push the trunk
lid lock knob down, then to the opposite
direction of the “LOCK (
)” position.
1. Pull the release lever on the lower left
side of the instrument panel to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift (2)
the hood.
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely
by itself after it has been raised about
halfway.
OMG035003
3 71
Knowing your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
Make sure the hood is properly locked
before driving.
CAUTION - Hood
• Before closing the hood, make
sure that all engine parts and
tools have been removed from
the engine area and that no one’s
hands are near the hood opening.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
3 72
OMG035066
OMG035067
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
release button located on the driver’s
lower door.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
CAUTION
To avoid injury from sharp edges, it
is recommended that protective
gloves be worn if there is a need to
open the fuel filler door manually.
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can
cover your clothes or skin and thus
subject you to the risk of fire and
burns. Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap is
venting fuel or if you hear a hissing
sound, wait until the condition
stops before completely removing
the cap.
WARNING - Refueling dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline ShutOff, if available, at the gas station
facility.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing or
sliding against any item or fabric
(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
• When using a portable fuel container be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry and
store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
(Continued)
3 73
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at a
gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire department or 911.
3 74
✽ NOTICE
• Make sure to refuel with unleaded
fuel only.
• Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is
securely closed after refueling. A loose
fuel filler cap may cause the “Check
Engine (Malfuntion indicator,
)”
light in the instrument panel to illuminate unnecessarily.
• If the fuel filler cap requires replacement, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel
spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
CHECK
OMG035068
When fuel filler lid does not open
with the release button
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the emergency hook for fuel filler
lid inside the trunk.
Knowing your vehicle
MIRRORS
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the control levers or remote
switch, depending on the type of mirror
control installed. The mirror heads can be
folded back to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing in a
narrow street.
CAUTION
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing
lanes.
✽ NOTICE
Do not scrape ice off the mirror face;
this may damage the surface of the
glass. If ice should restrict movement of
the mirror, do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very
warm water.
OMG035069
Manual remote control
(if equipped)
To adjust an outside mirror, move the
control lever located at the forward inside
area of the window frame.
3 75
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The mirrors stop moving when they
reach the maximum adjusting angles,
but the motor continues to operate
while the switch is depressed. Do not
depress the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside
rearview mirror by hands. Doing so
may damage the parts.
OMG035070
OMG035071
Electric remote control
(if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point (▲) on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neutral position to prevent the inadvertent
adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it back,
toward the rear of the vehicle.
3 76
Knowing your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror heater
(if equipped)
The outside rearview mirror heater is
automatically turned on when the rear
window defroster is turned on. To heat
the outside rearview mirror glass, push
the button for the rear window defroster.
The rearview mirror heater (and rear window defroster) will not operate unless the
engine is running.
The outside rearview mirror glass will be
heated for defrosting or defogging and
will give you improved rear vision in
inclement weather conditions. Push the
button again to turn the heater off. The
outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
Night
CAUTION
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision out the rear window.
Day/Night lever
Day
OMG035072
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
3 77
Knowing your vehicle
Electric type (if equipped)
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror. The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and through a
chemical reaction, automatically controls
the headlight glare from vehicles behind
you.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into
reverse (R), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is ON, the automatic- dimming function will turn on automatically.
✽ NOTICE
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
3 78
Indicator
1
Sensor
Indicator
Sensor
OMG035073
B520C01MG
Type A
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) once again
to turn the automatic- dimming function
on, the mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Type B - with compass and homelink
wireless control system (if equipped)
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The mirror indicator light will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) once again
to turn the automatic- dimming function
on, the mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Knowing your vehicle
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
B520C01MG
1. Channel 1 Button
2. Channel 2 Button
3. Status Indicator LED
4. Channel 3 Button
Z-Nav™ Integrated HomeLink®
Wireless control system
The HomeLink® Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single
built-in device. This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of most
current transmitters to operate devices
such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard
and rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the outlined procedures. Additional HomeLink®
information can be found at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
Before programming HomeLink® to
a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm or
damage. Do not use HomeLink®
with any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and reverse
features as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to stop
and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. Federal Safety Standards.
Using a garage door opener without
these features increases the risk of
serious injury or death.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in
other vehicles as well as for future
HomeLink® programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons be
erased for security purposes.
3 79
Knowing your vehicle
Programming HomeLink®
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned to the second (or "accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink.
• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps
listed
below,
contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
3 80
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press and
hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel 3
Buttons, until the indicator light begins
to flash (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons. Do not hold the buttons
for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 5-14 cm (1-3 inches) away
from the HomeLink® buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both
the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the buttons
the red Indicator Status LED will flash
slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® successfully trains to the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pressed and released.
6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Knowing your vehicle
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are "codeprotected" and manufactured after 1996
may be determined by the following:
• Reference the device owner's manual
for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears to
program the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver but does not activate the
device.
• Press and hold the trained HomeLink
button. The device has the rolling code
feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after 2 seconds.
To train rolling code devices, follow these
instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the
device owner's manual or please visit
our Web site at www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button (which activates the
"training light").
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and then release
the desired HomeLink® button.
Repeat the "press/hold/release"
sequence a second time to complete
the programming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate.
5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink® buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.
Gate operator & canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the Integrated
HomeLink® Wireless Control System
button (note steps 2 through 4 in the
Standard Programming portion of this
document) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter every
two seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink®
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed
HomeLink®
button.
Activation will now occur for the trained
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate
operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of
the device may also be used at any time.
3 81
Knowing your vehicle
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink® button
To program a new device to a previously
trained HomeLink® button, follow these
steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld transmitter button. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink® button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your new device
should activate.
3 82
Erasing HomeLink® buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed
buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed at
any time following the appropriate steps
in the Programming sections above.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with Industry
Canada standard RSS-210. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes or
modifications
not
expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the
device.
NVS® is a registered trademark and ZNav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation,
Zeeland,
Michigan.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
owned
by
Johnson
Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
Knowing your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHTS
✽ NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OMG035076
OMG035077
Map light (if equipped)
Dome light (if equipped)
The lights are turned ON or OFF by
pressing the corresponding switch.
(1) OFF
: The light stays off even when a door
is open.
(2) DOOR
: The light turns on when a door is
opened or when a door is unlocked
by the transmitter (if equipped).
Interior light goes out slowly after 30
seconds if the door is closed.
However if the ignition switch is ON
or all vehicle doors are locked when
the door is closed, interior light will
turn off even within 30 seconds.
(3) ON
: The light turns on and stays on even
when the doors are all closed.
✽ NOTICE
Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
3 83
Knowing your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
✽ NOTICE
(if equipped)
• To avoid possible theft, do not leave
valuables in the storage compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment
covers closed while driving. Do not
attempt to place many items in the
storage compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
1
OMG035078
WARNING - Flammable
OMG035080
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
Multi box (if equipped)
To open the cover, push the button and
pull the cover down. It can be used for
storing small items.
2
OMG035079
Center console storage
To open either of the console storage
compartments, press button (1, if
equipped) or (2).
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
3 84
Knowing your vehicle
CAUTION
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving to avoid head
injury in a collision.
CAUTION
OMG035081
OMG035082
Glove box
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key (1, if
equipped).
It cannot be locked/unlocked with the sub
key (if equipped).
To open the glove box, make sure it is
unlocked, then pull the handle (2) and the
glove box will automatically open (3).
Close the glove box after use.
A sunglass storage compartment is provided on the overhead console. To open
the sunglass holder, press the cover and
the holder will slowly open. Place your
sunglasses in the compartment door with
the lenses facing out. Push to close.
Do not use the sunglass holder
while driving. This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
causing serious injury or property
damage.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of injury in case
of an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
3 85
Knowing your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
✽ NOTICE
OMG035083
• Do not hold the lighter in after it is
already heated because it will overheat.
• Only a genuine Kia lighter should be
used in the cigarette lighter socket.
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and
coffee pots, for example) may damage
the socket or cause electrical failure.
• If the lighter does not pop out within
30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating.
OMG035084
Cigarette lighter
Ashtrays
To use the cigarette lighter, press the
front face then release it to allow the cigarette lighter and ashtray to slowly
extend from center panel.
To operate the cigarette lighter, press it in
and release it. When it is heated, it automatically pops out ready for use.
If the engine is not running, the ignition
switch must be in the ACC position for
the lighter to operate.
To use the ashtray, press the front face
and release it to allow the cigarette
lighter and ashtray to slowly extend from
center panel.
To remove the ashtray, grasp the ashtray
bucket and carefully pull it out.
3 86
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in
an ashtray with other combustible
materials may cause a fire.
Knowing your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you could be burned.
Such a burn to the driver could
cause a loss of control of the
vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncovered or insecure bottles, glasses,
cans, etc., in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion.
OMG035085N
HNF2185
Front
The cup holder can be used by lifting its
cover.
Rear (if equipped)
To use cup holders in rear seat, pull
down the rear seat armrest.
3 87
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Front
• Close the vanity mirror cover securely
and return the sunvisor to its original
position after use.
• If the vanity mirror lamp is equipped
and mirror cover is not closed securely, the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge.
OMG035088
Rear
OMG035087
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window
shade, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the side.
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and pull up the mirror cover (2, if
equipped).
Pull the extension panel (3) of the sunvisor to lengthen the sunvisor.
3 88
OMG035089
Power socket (if equipped)
The power outlets are designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate with
vehicle electrical systems. The devices
should draw less than 10 amps with the
engine running.
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Use the power outlet when the engine
is running, and remove a plug from
the power outlet after using the electric appliance. Using the power outlet
excessively or while the engine is not
running or leaving appliances plugged
into the power outlet when not in use
will cause battery discharge
• Only use the electric appliances which
are less than 12V and 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to
the lowest operation level when you
have to use the power socket while
using air-conditioner or heater.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when plugged
into a vehicle’s power outlet. These
devices may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
OMG035090
Digital clock (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals or memory fuse are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operates
as follows:
• HOUR:
Pressing the “H” button with your finger, a pencil or similar object will
advance the time displayed by one
hour.
• MINUTE:
Pressing the “M” button with your finger, a pencil or similar object will
advance the time displayed by one
minute.
• RESET:
To clear away minutes, press the “R”
button with your finger, a pencil or similar object. Then the clock will be set
precisely on the hour.
For example, if the “R” button is
pressed while the time is between 9:01
and 9:29, the display will be reset to
9:00.
9:01 ~ 9:29 ➾ 9:00
9:30 ~ 9:59 ➾ 10:00
To change the 12 hour format to the 24
hour format, press the “R” button for
more than 5 seconds.
For example, if the “R” button is pressed
for more than 5 seconds while the time is
10:15 p.m., the display will be changed to
22:15.
3 89
Knowing your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OMG035092
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can slide or tilt your sunroof
with the sunroof control buttons located
on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not continue to press the sunroof
control button(s) after the sunroof is
in the fully open, closed, or tilt position(s). Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
• The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
3 90
Sliding the sunroof
Tilting the sunroof
Autoslide open
To use the autoslide feature, momentarily (more than 0.5 second) press the
SLIDE OPEN (
) button on the overhead console. The sunroof will slide all
the way open. To stop the sunroof sliding
at any point, press any sunroof control
button.
Autotilt open
To use the autotilt feature, momentarily
(more than 0.5 second) press the TILT
UP (
) button on the overhead console. The sunroof will tilt all the way open.
To stop the sunroof tilting at any point,
press any sunroof control button.
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN (
) button on
the overhead console for less than 0.5
second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE
(
) button on the overhead console
and hold it until the sunroof is closed.
Manual tilt open
Press the TILT UP (
) button on the
overhead console for less than 0.5 second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE
(
) button on the overhead console
and hold it until the sunroof is closed.
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
OMG035093
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with the
glass panel automatically when the glass
panel is slid.You will have to close it manually if you want it closed.
• Do not press any sunroof control button longer than necessary. Damage to
the motor or system components
could occur.
• Periodically remove any dirt that may
accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing or
when the sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor could be
damaged.
• The sunroof is made to slide together
with sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.
WARNING
• Do not extend face or arms outside through the sunroof opening
while driving.
• Make sure hand and face are
safely out of the way before closing a sunroof.
OMG035094
In case of an emergency
If the sunroof does not open electrically:
1. Open the sunglass holder.
2. Remove the two (2) screws, and then
remove the overhead console.
3 91
Knowing your vehicle
LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or you use the
emergency handle to operate the sunroof, you have to reset your sunroof system as follows:
OMG035096
3. Insert the emergency handle (provided
with the vehicle) and turn the handle
clockwise to open or counterclockwise
to close.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. Set the sunroof to the maximum TILTUP position using the corresponding
sunroof switch.
3. Then, release it.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP button
once again until the sunroof has
returned to the original position of TILT
UP after it is raised a little higher than
the maximum TILT UP position. This
may take several seconds.
When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.
OMG035097
OMG035227
To keep items from shifting in the trunk,
you can use the four rings located in the
trunk to attach the cargo net.
✽ NOTICE
Do not put fragile, bulky or an excessive
quantity of items into luggage net. They
could be damaged.
3 92
Knowing your vehicle
ANTENNA
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT overstretch the netting.
ALWAYS keep face and body out of
recoil path of the net, in case of
strap.
DO NOT use the luggage net when
strap has visible signs of wear or
damage.
1LDN3204
Fixed rod antenna
(if equipped)
Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast signals.
This antenna is removable. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
MMSA3076
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition key is in either the “ON”
or “ACC” position, your car will receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals
through the antenna in the rear window
glass.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not clean the inside of the rear
window glass with a cleaner or use a
scraper to remove the foreign deposits
as this may cause damage to the
antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coating such as
Ni, Cd, and so on. These can disturb
receiving AM and FM broadcast signals.
3 93
Knowing your vehicle
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
MODE
Type A
Press the MODE button to select Radio,
Tape (if equipped) or CD (compact disc).
MUTE
• Press the MUTE button to deactivate
the sound.
• Once again press the MUTE button to
reactivate the sound.
OMG045080C
Type B
VOL (▲/▼)
OMG045081C
✽ NOTICE
Do not operate audio remote control
buttons simultaneously.
3 94
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the button is pressed for less than 0.8
second, it will work as follows in each
mode.
• Press the VOL (▲) button to increase
volume.
• Press the VOL (▼) button to decease
volume.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
SEEK/PRESET (▲/▼)
TAPE mode
It will function as the AUTO MUSIC
Search(AMS) button.
If the button is pressed for 0.8 second or
more, it will work as follows in each
mode.
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driving.
TAPE mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
Knowing your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
FM reception
AM reception
FM radio station
¢ ¢ ¢
¢ ¢¢
JBM001
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your car. This signal is
then received by the radio and sent to
your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
¢ ¢¢
JBM002
JBM003
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
3 95
Knowing your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
¢ ¢¢
CAUTION
JBM004
JBM005
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
3 96
When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Don’t use a cellular phone when
you are driving. The driver must
stop at a safe place to use a cellular
phone.
Knowing your vehicle
Care of cassette tapes
(if equipped)
• Because the thickness of a cassette
tape with the total playback time of
over 60 minutes (C-60) are too thin, we
suggest that you do not use any of
them to avoid having tapes being tangled.
• To achieve better sound quality, periodically clean the tape head using a cotton stick with colorless alcohol (once
per month).
• If a tape is too loose, fasten it to reel by
winding with objects like a pencil.
• Because dust or foreign objects on a
cassette tape may damage the playback head, always store tapes in their
cases when not in use.
• Make sure cassette tapes are kept
away from magnetic devices (TV,
stereo system, etc) in order to achieve
better sound quality.
• Be certain that no objects or substances
other than cassette tapes are inserted
into the cassette tape player.
• Because tape media can be distorted
when exposed to direct sunlight, Do
not leave cassette tapes on the seats,
dashboard or near the back windshield.
Care of disc (if equipped)
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation
before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files without
permission(If equipped with M465, use
only MP3/WMA, If equipped with M445,
use only CD-DA). Use CDs that are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft
cloth before playback (wipe it from the
center to the outside edge.)
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CDRW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy-Protected
Audio CD
Some copy-protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards(Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player of your car audio is not performing to your expectation, this may be
caused by those CDs and not a defect in
the device itself. Please replace those
CDs.
3 97
Knowing your vehicle
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M421) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND(AM/FM) Select Button
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. SCAN Button
6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
MG-M421USA
3 98
Knowing your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
3. TUNE/MODE Select Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. Press the knob to switch the power
on. The LCD shows the radio frequency
in the radio mode, the tape direction indicator in the tape mode. To switch the
power off, press the knob again.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the frequency.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.
Mode Select Knob
Pressing the MODE knob changes the
BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER
and BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the
mode select knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
2. BAND Selector
BAND Selection Button
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
AM, FM1 and FM2 bands.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease the
MID, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
3 99
Knowing your vehicle
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the
side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the
side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
5. SCAN Button
When you Press the button, frequency is
changed and the next channel is
received automatically.
To stay on a station, press the SCAN
button again.
6. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit.
3 100
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM /
FM select button and/or one of the six
station select buttons, you may recall any
of these stations instantly. To program the
stations, follow these steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press and hold the station select button
for more than 0.8 seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display
indicating which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the next
desired station. A total of 18 stations
can be programmed by selecting one
AM and two FM stations per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
Knowing your vehicle
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M421) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. TAPE PROGRAM Button
2. TAPE EJECT Button
3. DOLBY Button
4. REPEAT(RPT) Button
5. AUTO MUSIC SEARCH (AMS) Button
6. FF/REW Button
MG-M421USA
3 101
Knowing your vehicle
1. TAPE PROGRAM Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
6. FF/REW Button
• This allows you to play the reverse side
of the tape by merely depressing the
program button. An arrow will appear in
the display to show tape direction.
• Push the TAPE button while the tape is
in the tape deck, to turn on that function without pushing Power ON-OFF
control knob.
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press again.
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again or turn the
power OFF then ON.
• Forward tape winding starts when the
FF button is pressed during PLAY or
REW mode.
• Tape PLAY starts when the FF button
is pressed again during FF mode.
• Tape rewinding starts when the REW
button is pressed during PLAY or FF
mode.
• Tape PLAY starts when the REW button pressed again during REW mode.
2. TAPE EJECT Button
• When the
button is pressed with a
cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.
• When the
button is pressed during
FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.
3. DOLBY Button
If you get background noise during tape
PLAY, you can reduce this considerably
by merely pressing the DOLBY button. If
you want to cancel the DOLBY feature,
press the button again.
3 102
5. AUTO MUSIC Search (AMS)
Button
Press the button to find the starting point
of each song in a prerecorded music
tape. The quiet space between songs
(must have at least 4 sec. gap) can be
identified by the AUTO MUSIC SEARCH
button.
• Pressing the
button will play the
beginning of the next music segment.
• Pressing the
button will start replay
at the beginning of the music just listened to.
• To stop FF or REW action, press the
button again.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not insert anything like coins into
the player slot as damage to the unit
may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
Knowing your vehicle
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connected to
vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can
switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing
TAPE PROGRAM Button for more than
0.8 seconds.
AUX
3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
✽ NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connected,
you cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.
• When the AUX device is disconnected
while in AUX-IN mode, the unit automatically switches its mode to last
selected mode (Tape mode or RADIO
mode).
• The quality of sound may be defected
or distorted when the unit's EQ
(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and
AUX device's EQ control are both
enabled (not flat). When you want to
use the unit's EQ control feature, disable the AUX device's EQ control feature, and vice versa.
3 103
Knowing your vehicle
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M446) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons
3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. RADIO SCAN Button
6. EQ Button
7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
MG-M446USA
3 104
Knowing your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
• The radio unit may be operated when
the ignition key is in the “ACC”or “ON”
position. Press the knob to switch the
power on. The LCD shows the radio
frequency in radio mode, and displays
the CD track in CD mode. To switch the
power off, press the knob again.
• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn on that
function without pushing the Power
ON-OFF control knob.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.
2. BAND Selector
FM Selection Button
Pressing the FM button changes the
FM1 and FM2 bands.
AM(MW, LW) Selection Button
Pressing the AM button selects the AM
band. AM mode is displayed on the LCD.
3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control
Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the frequency.
Mode Select Knob
Pressing the MODE knob changes the
BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER
and BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
mode select knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease the
MID-RANGE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the
side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the
side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
3 105
Knowing your vehicle
5. RADIO SCAN Button
When you Press the button, frequency is
changed and the next channel is
received automatically.
To stay on a station, press the RADIO
SCAN button again.
6. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
7. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/
FM band select buttons and/or one of the
six station select buttons, you may recall
any of these stations instantly.
3 106
To program the stations, follow these
steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press and hold the station select button for more than 0.8 seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the display
indicating which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting
one AM and two FM station per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
Knowing your vehicle
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M446) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. CD/AUX Select Button
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
3. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. CD SCAN Button
6. CD EJECT Button
7. RANDOM (RDM) Button
MG-M446USA
3 107
Knowing your vehicle
1. CD/AUX Select Button
CD Select
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• When a disc is in the CD deck, if you
press the CD/AUX button the CD player will begin playing even if the radio
player is being used.
• The CD/AUX player can be used when
the ignition switch is in either the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on
that function without pushing the
Power ON-OFF control knob.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
• The unit cannot play a CDR(Recordable
CD)
and
CDRW(Rewritable CD) that is not finalized.
Please refer to the manual of CDR/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW
software for more information on
finalization process.
(Continued)
3 108
(Continued)
• Depending on the recording status,
some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be
played on this unit.
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connected to
vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can
switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing
CD/AUX button.
• With a CD loaded and AUX device
connected at the same time, this button switches between AUX-IN mode
and CD mode.
AUX
3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
✽ NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connected,
you cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.
• When the AUX device is disconnected
while in AUX-IN mode, the unit automatically switches its mode to last
selected mode (CD mode or RADIO
mode).
• The quality of sound may be defected
or distorted when the unit's EQ
(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and
AUX device's EQ control are both
enabled (not flat). When you want to
use the unit's EQ control feature, disable the AUX device's EQ control feature, and vice versa.
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc currently
being played can be selected using the
track number.
• Press
button once to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press
within a second after playback begins to quickly move backward
through a CD.
If you press
after more than a second, it will take you to the beginning of
the track you are now listening to.
Knowing your vehicle
3. FF/REW Button
6. CD EJECT Button
✽ NOTICE
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push and
hold the
or
button.
When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
When the
button is pressed with a CD
loaded, the CD will eject.
Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,
press this button for more than 3 seconds.
(Do this only when a CD is jammed and
you can not eject it in the normal way e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2
CDs by mistake)
• To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle's air conditioning or heating
system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct capacity.
• All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnected
or power to the vehicle is lost. If this
occurs, the bookmarks will have to be
reset.
• This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system
with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision parts.
Do not attempt to disassemble or
adjust any parts.
• When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
• Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and CD) to water or
excessive moisture.
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press it again.
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again or turn the
Power OFF then ON.
5. CD SCAN Button
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN button.
• Press the CD SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
7. RANDOM (RDM) Button
With random, you can listen to the tracks
in random, rather than sequential order.
To use random, do the following:
Press the RDM button to listen to recorded tracks in random sequence. Press
RDM again to cancel or turn the power
OFF then ON. The unit defaults to playing
tracks in sequential order.
3 109
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not insert anything like coins into
the player slot as damage to the unit
may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
• Off-road or rough surface driving
may cause the compact disc to skip.
Do not use the compact disc when
driving in such conditions as damage
to the compact disc face could occur.
• Do not attempt to grab or pull the
compact disc out while the disc is
being pulled into the audio unit by the
self-loading mechanism. Damage to
the audio unit and compact disc could
occur.
• Avoid using recorded compact discs in
your audio unit. Original compact
discs are recommended for best
results.
3 110
Knowing your vehicle
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M456) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. RADIO SCAN Button
4. EQ Button
5. AUTO SEEK Select Button
6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select Knob
MG-M456USA
3 111
Knowing your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
4. EQ Button
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
• The radio unit may be operated when
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON"
position. Press the button to switch the
power on. The LCD shows the radio
frequency in the radio mode, CD/MP3
track in the CD/MP3 mode. To switch
the power off, press the button again.
• Push the FM/AM or CD/MP3 to turn on
that function without pushing Power
ON-OFF control knob.
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the
AM/FM band select button and/or one of
the six station select buttons, you may
recall any of these stations instantly. To
program the stations, follow these steps:
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
5. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the
side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the
side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
2. BAND Select Button
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
3. RADIO SCAN Button
When you press the button, frequency is
changed and the next channel is
received automatically.
To stay on a station, press the RADIO
SCAN button again.
3 112
6. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit.
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
• Press and hold the station select button
for more than 0.8 seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored in to the
memory.You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next
desired station. A total of 18 stations can
be programmed by selecting one AM and
two FM station per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
Knowing your vehicle
7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select
Button
7-1. AUDIO
Pressing the AUDIO button changes the
BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER
and BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the
Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counter clockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
7-2. TUNE Select Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the frequency.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease the
MID-RANGE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
3 113
Knowing your vehicle
COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M456) (IF EQUIPPED) - COMPATIABLE WITH MP3/WMA/WAVE
1. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select Button
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
3. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. RANDOM (RDM) Button
6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button
7. SCROLL Button
8. EQ Button
9. CD EJECT Button
10. CD SCAN Button
11. FILE SEARCH Knob
(TUNE Select Knob)
12. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR) Button
13. INFO Button
MG-M456USA
3 114
Knowing your vehicle
1. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select
Button
AUDIO/MP3 CD Select
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• If you press the CD/AUX button while a
disc is in the CD deck, the CD player
will begin playing even if the radio or
cassette player is being used.
• The CD/AUX player can be used when
the ignition switch is in either the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on
that function without pushing the
Power ON-OFF control knob.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
• The unit can play a multi-session CDR (recordable CD) and CD-RW
(rewritable CD) that consists of more
than two sessions.
Please refer to the manual of CDR/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW
software for more information on
finalization process.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Depending on the recording status,
some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be
played on this unit.
✽ NOTICE
Playback of MP3 and WMA file formats
are supported. Load to play time for
these formats may be longer due to the
compressed nature of these discs.
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connected to
vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can
switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing
CD/AUX button.
• With a CD loaded and AUX device
connected at the same time, this button switches between AUX-IN mode
and CD mode.
AUX
3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
✽ NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connected,
you cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.
• When the AUX device is disconnected
while in AUX-IN mode, the unit automatically switches its mode to last
selected mode (CD mode or RADIO
mode).
• The quality of sound may be defected
or distorted when the unit's EQ
(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and
AUX device's EQ control are both
enabled (not flat). When you want to
use the unit's EQ control feature, disable the AUX device's EQ control feature, and vice versa.
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc currently
being played can be selected using the
track number.
• Press
button once to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press
within a second after playback begins to quickly move backward
through a CD.
If you press
after more than a second, it will take you to the beginning of
the file you are now listening to.
3 115
Knowing your vehicle
3. FF/REW Button
5. RANDOM (RDM) Button
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push and
hold the FF or REW button.
When you release the button, the compact
disc player will resume playing.
With random, you can listen to the tracks
in random, rather than sequential order.
To use random, do the following:
• Press the RDM button to listen to
recorded tracks in random sequence.
Press RDM again to cancel or turn the
power OFF then ON. The unit defaults
to playing tracks in sequential order.
• To listen to the music within the selected folder in random order, press the
RDM button within a second. To cancel, press it again or turn the power
OFF then ON . (MP3 CD only)
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button. To
cancel, press it again.
• To repeat the music within selected
folder, press the RPT button for more
than 0.8 seconds. To cancel, press it
again. (MP3 CD only)
• If you do not release RPT operation
when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again or turn the power
OFF then ON.
3 116
6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button
When the CD player unit is operating, the
desired track on the disc can be bookmarked by using the MARK button.(MP3
CD only)
• Press the MARK button for more than
0.8 seconds to bookmark the desired
track.
“M” will be displayed on the LCD and
“MEMORY(1~50)” will display for
approximately five seconds with beep
sound.
To play a bookmarked track, press the
MARK button within 0.8 seconds and
select the bookmarked track to play.
• To erase a bookmarked track, press
the MARK button for more than 0.8
seconds. The unit will beep once when
the bookmark is erased.
✽ NOTICE
Tracks stored using the Bookmark function will be automatically erased after
you eject CDs that contain those tracks.
7. SCROLL Button
Press the button, and you can check the
file names with more than 16 characters
on MP3 CD(max 34 characters.).
The button doesn’t work on file names
with less than 16 characters.
8. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
Knowing your vehicle
9. CD EJECT Button
When the
button is pressed with a CD
loaded, the CD will eject.
Forcing to eject : To force to eject a CD,
press this button for more than 3 seconds.
(Do this only when a CD is jammed and
you can not eject it in the normal way e.g.) in case that you have inserted 2
CDs by mistake)
10. CD SCAN Button
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN button
more than 0.8 seconds.
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track in the selected folder, press
the CD SCAN button within 0.8 seconds. (MP3 CD only)
• Press the CD SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
11. FILE SEARCH Knob
(TUNE Select Knob)
• You can skip the track (file) by turning
the FILE SEARCH knob clockwise or
counterclockwise.
After selecting the desired track (file),
press the FILE SEARCH knob to playback the track (file).
If you do not press the FILE SEARCH
knob within five seconds, the search
will stop.
12. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR)
Button
• You can move through the folder by
pushing the FLDR button to up (
)
and down(
).
• After moving the desired folder, press
the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in
the selected folder. If you do not press
the FILE SEARCH knob within 5 seconds, the folder searching function will
be released. It can not be operated in a
single folder.
13. INFO Button
While playing CD(MP3), If this button is
pressed repeatedly, the played file information will be displayed in the following
order.
FILE NAME ➟ SONG TITLE ➟ ARTIST
NAME ➟ ALBUM TITLE ➟ FOLDER
NAME ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ MARK
ADDRESS ➟ FILE NAME
“NO DATA” wil be displayed in case that
there is no information on the selected
item.
3 117
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
• To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle's air conditioning or heating
system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct capacity.
• All stored bookmarks are all erased
when the car battery is disconnected
or power to the vehicle is lost. If this
occurs, the bookmarks will have to be
reset.
• This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system
with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision parts.
Do not attempt to disassemble or
adjust any parts.
• When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
• Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and tape) to water or
excessive moisture.
• Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not insert anything like coins into
the player slot as damage to the unit
may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
• Off-road or rough surface driving
may cause the compact disc to skip.
Do not use the compact disc when
driving in such conditions as damage
to the compact disc face could occur.
• Do not attempt to grab or pull the
compact disc out while the disc is
being pulled into the audio unit by the
self-loading mechanism. Damage to
the audio unit and compact disc could
occur.
• Avoid using recorded compact discs in
your audio unit. Original compact
discs are recommended.
3 118
Knowing your vehicle
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M466) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button
3. AUTO SEEK Select Button
4. CD SCAN Select Button
5. EQ Select Button
6. PRESET Station Select Buttons
7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select Knob
MG-M466USA
3 119
Knowing your vehicle
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
• The radio unit may be operated when
the ignition key is in the "ACC" or “ON”
position. Press the knob to switch the
power on. The LCD shows the radio
frequency in the radio mode, the tape
direction indicator in the tape mode or
CD/MP3 track in the CD/MP3 mode or
CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch
the power off, press the knob again.
• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3 to
turn on that function without pushing
Power ON-OFF control knob.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.
2. BAND Select Button
Pressing the FM/AM button changes the
AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode
selected is shown on the display.
3 120
3. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
6. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the
side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next higher
frequency and when the
side is
pressed, it will automatically tune to the
next lower frequency.
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit.
4. CD SCAN Button
When you press the button, frequency is
changed and the next channel is
received automatically.
To stay on a station, press the CD SCAN
button again.
5. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be
programmed into the memory of the
radio. Then, by simply pressing the AM/
FM band select button and/or one of the
six station select buttons, you may recall
any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the band
for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be stored
by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access that
station.
Knowing your vehicle
• Press and hold the station select button for more than 0.8 seconds. A select
button indicator will show in the display
indicating which select button you have
depressed. The frequency display will
flash after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting
one AM and two FM station per button.
• When completed, any preset station
may be recalled by selecting AM, FM1
or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
7. AUDIO CONTROL / TUNE Select
Button
7-1. AUDIO
Pressing the AUDIO button changes the
BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE, FADER
and BALANCE mode. The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the
Audio control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease the
MID-RANGE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized (right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
7-2. TUNE Select Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the frequency and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the frequency.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
3 121
Knowing your vehicle
COMPACT DISC PLAYER/CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (M466) (IF EQUIPPED)
- COMPATIABLE WITH MP3/WMA
1. LOAD Select Button
2. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select Button
3. CD EJECT Button
4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
5. SCROLL Button
6. FF/REW Button
7. EQ Button
8. CD SCAN Button
9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button
10. REPEAT (RPT) Button
11. RANDOM (RDM) Button
12. DISC UP/DOWN Button
13. FILE SEARCH Knob
(TUNE Select Knob)
14. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR) Button
15. INFO Button
MG-M466USA
3 122
Knowing your vehicle
1. LOAD Select Button
This compact disc player will accommodate up to six compact discs.
To insert multiple discs into the player,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the LOAD Button.
2. Green light on the slot will be illuminated and the lowest number of empty
slot will blink on the display.
After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD,
the slot will open with “INSERT” displayed on the LCD.
3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When the disc is inserted, the disc will
begin to play automatically.
✽ NOTICE
• The disc can be only inserted while the
green light is blinking on the slot.
• This CD player is suitable only for 12
cm discs, do not use irregular shaped
CDs.
To insert multiple discs:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for
one second or more.
You will then hear a beep sound and
the green light on the slot will be illuminated, and the numbers of empty disc
will blink on the display.
2. After “WAIT” is displayed on the LCD
with the lowest number of empty slot
blinking, the slot will open with “INSERT”
displayed on the LCD.
3. Insert a disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the numbers
of the empty disc will blink on the display continuously.
If the next “DISC NO.” is displayed when
the slot is illuminated, you can then load
another disc.
4. Load the remaining disc by following
procedures 1 and 2. When you finished
loading 6 discs, the CD player will
begin to play the last CD loaded.
5. To load more than one disc but less
than six, complete Steps 1 and 2.
When you have finished loading discs,
press LOAD button to cancel the loading
function or wait for 10 seconds. The CD
player will begin to play the last CD
loaded. As each CD starts to play, the
DISC number will appear on the display.
✽ NOTICE
The disc player takes up to six discs. Do
not try to load more than six.
2. AUDIO/MP3 CD/AUX Select
Button
AUDIO/MP3 CD Select
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• If you press the CD/AUX button while a
disc is in the CD deck, the CD player
will begin playing even if the radio or
cassette player is being used.
• The CD/AUX player can be used when
the ignition switch is in either the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on
that function without pushing the
Power ON-OFF control knob.
3 123
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Playback of MP3 and WMA file formats
are supported. Load to play time for
these formats may be longer due to the
compressed nature of these discs.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
• The unit can play a multi-session CDR (recordable CD) and CD-RW
(rewritable CD) that consists of more
than two sessions.
Please refer to the manual of CDR/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RW
software for more information on
finalization process.
• Depending on the recording status,
some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not play
on this unit.
3 124
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connected to
vehicle's AUX-IN terminal, you can
switch to AUX-IN mode by pressing
CD/AUX button.
• With a CD loaded and AUX device
connected at the same time, this button switches between AUX-IN mode
and CD mode.
AUX
3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
✽ NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connected, you
cannot switch to AUX-IN mode.
• When the AUX device is disconnected
while in AUX-IN mode, the unit automatically switches its mode to last
selected mode (CD mode or RADIO
mode).
• The quality of sound may be defected
or distorted when the unit's EQ
(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and
AUX device's EQ control are both
enabled (not flat). When you want to
use the unit's EQ control feature, disable the AUX device's EQ control feature, and vice versa.
3. CD EJECT Button
• When the
button is pressed with a
CD loaded, the CD will eject.
• To eject all of the discs, press this button for one second or more.
Knowing your vehicle
4. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
7. EQ Button
9. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button
• The desired track on the disc currently
being played can be selected using the
track number.
• Press
once to skip forward to the
beginning of the next track.
• Press
once to skip back to the
beginning of the track.
• Press
before playback begins to
quickly move backward through a CD.
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and OFF
MODE for the desired tone quality. Each
press of the button changes the display
as follows;
When the CD player unit is operating, the
desired track on the disc can be bookmarked by using the MARK button.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
8. CD SCAN Button
5. SCROLL Button
Press the button, and you can check the file
names with more than 16 characters on
MP3 CD(max 34 characters).
The button doesn’t work on file names
less than 16 characters.
6. FF/REW Button
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push and
hold the FF or REW button.
When you release the button, the compact
disc player will resume playing.
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN button
more than 0.8 seconds.
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track in the selected folder, press
the CD SCAN button within 0.8 seconds. (MP3 CD only)
• Press the CD SCAN button again within 10 sec. when you have reached the
desired track.
• Press the MARK button for more than
0.8 seconds to bookmark the desired
track.
“M” will be displayed on the LCD and
“MEMORY(1~50)” will display for
approximately five seconds with beep
sound.
To play the bookmarked tracks, press
the MARK button within 0.8 seconds
and select the bookmarked track to
play.
• To erase a bookmarked track, press the
MARK button for more than 0.8 seconds. The unit will beep once when the
bookmark is erased.
If you want to delete all tracks stored using
the Bookmark function, press FILE
SEARCH Knob in the Mark Play mode for
more than 0.8 seconds.You will hear a beep
sound and all tracks will be deleted from
Mark Memory with “MARK DELETE ALL”
displayed on the LCD.
3 125
Knowing your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
11. RANDOM (RDM) Button
Tracks stored on Mark Memory will be
automatically erased after you eject CDs
that contain those tracks.
With random, you can listen to the tracks
in random, rather than sequential order
on one disc.
10. REPEAT (RPT) Button
To use random, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are currently
listening to, press the RPT button.
To cancel, press it again.
• To repeat the music within selected
CD, press the RPT button for more
than 0.8 seconds.
To cancel, press it again for more than
0.8 seconds.
• To repeat the music within the currently played folder, press the RPT button
for more than 0.8 seconds.
To cancel, press it again(MP3 CD
only).
• If you do not release RPT operation
after all the tracks are played back, the
unit will play back again from the first
track.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again or turn the power
OFF then ON.
3 126
• Press the RDM button to listen to
recorded tracks in random sequence.
Press RDM again to cancel or turn the
power OFF then ON. The unit defaults
to playing tracks in sequential order.
• To listen to the music within the selected folder in random order, press the
RDM button within a second. To cancel, press it again or turn the power
OFF then ON. (MP3 CD only)
12. DISC UP/DOWN Button
• By pressing "DISC
"/"DISC
"
while CD changer is playing you can
move backward or forward to the next
disc and playback automatically
begins.
• If any of the slots do not contain a CD,
your car audio will skip the empty slot
and play only those that contain a CD.
When switching CD’s, the LCD displays the selected CD’s number.
13. FILE SEARCH Knob
(TUNE Select Knob)
• You can skip the track (file) by turning
the FILE SEARCH knob clockwise or
counterclockwise.
After selecting the desired track (file),
press the FILE SEARCH knob to playback the track (file).
If you do not press the FILE SEARCH
knob within five seconds, the search
will stop.
14. FOLDER SEARCH (FLDR)
Button
• You can move through the folder by
pushing the FLDR button to up (
)
and down(
).
• After moving the desired folder, press
the FILE SEARCH knob to play back in
the selected folder. If you do not press
the FILE SEARCH knob within 5 seconds, the folder searching function will
be released. It can not be operated in a
single folder.
Knowing your vehicle
15. INFO Button
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
While playing CD(MP3), If this button is
pressed repeatedly, the played file information will be displayed in the following
order.
FILE NAME ➟ SONG TITLE ➟ ARTIST
NAME ➟ ALBUM TITLE ➟ FOLDER
NAME ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ MARK
ADDRESS ➟ FILE NAME
“NO DATA” wil be displayed in case that
there is no information on the selected
item.
• To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle's air conditioning or heating
system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct capacity.
• Stored bookmarks are all erased when
the car battery is disconnected or
power to the vehicle is lost. If this
occurs, the bookmarks will have to be
reset.
• This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system
with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision parts.
Do not attempt to disassemble or
adjust any parts.
• When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
• Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and tape) to water or
excessive moisture.
• Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to
the unit may occur.
• Do not insert anything like coins into
the player slot as damage to the unit
may occur.
• Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism may be damaged if you spill
them.
• Do not strike or allow anything to
impact the audio system, damage to
the system mechanisms could occur.
• Off-road or rough surface driving
may cause the compact disc to skip.
Do not use the compact disc when
driving in such conditions as damage
to the compact disc face could occur.
• Do not attempt to grab or pull the
compact disc out while the disc is
being pulled into the audio unit by the
self-loading mechanism. Damage to
the audio unit and compact disc could
occur.
• Avoid using recorded compact discs in
your audio unit. Original compact
discs are recommended.
3 127
Ignition switch / 4-2
Starting the engine / 4-3
Manual transaxle / 4-4
Automatic transaxle / 4-6
Brake system / 4-10
Steering wheel / 4-16
Cruise control system / 4-18
Electronic stability control / 4-21
Driving your vehicle
Instrument cluster / 4-24
Gauges / 4-25
Warnings and indicators / 4-30
Compass - Z-Nav™ compass / 4-36
Rear parking assist system / 4-37
Lighting / 4-40
Wipers and washers / 4-43
Defroster / 4-46
Hazard warning flasher / 4-47
Manual climate control system / 4-48
Automatic climate control / 4-55
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-63
4
Driving your vehicle
IGNITION SWITCH
ON
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The warning lights
can be checked before the engine is
started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
OMG045001
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a door is opened, the ignition
switch will be illuminated for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is
not in the ON position. The light will go off
approximately 10 seconds after closing
the door or when the ignition switch is
turned on.
OMG045002
Ignition switch and anti-theft
steering column lock
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position (manual transaxle).
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.
4 2
START
Turn the ignition key to the START position to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
✽ NOTICE
If it is difficult to turn the ignition
key to the START position, turn the
steering wheel right and left to
release resistance and then turn the
key.
Automatic transaxle
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, the shift lever must be in
the P (Park) position.
Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident or collision.
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is engaged in 1st gear for manual
transaxle or P (Park) for automatic transaxle. Then, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine
off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this
area could cause a loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if
equipped).
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal depressed while turning the
ignition switch to the start position.
The starter will not operate if the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
CAUTION - Stall
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
✽ NOTICE
Do not engage the starter for more than
10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to
start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before reengaging the starter. Excessive or
improper use of the starter may damage
it.
The starter will not operate if:
• Manual Transaxle - the clutch pedal is
not fully depressed.
• Automatic Transaxle - the shift lever
is NOT in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)
position.
4 3
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has five forward
gears.
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The ring located immediately
below the shift knob must be pulled
upward while moving the shift lever to the
R position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
1
✽ NOTICE
When downshifting from fifth gear to
fourth gear, caution should be taken not
to inadvertently press the gear shift
lever sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a drastic
downshift may cause the engine speed to
increase to the point that the tachometer
will enter the red-zone. Such overrevving of the engine may possibly cause
engine damage.
The shift lever can be moved without pulling the ring (1).
The ring (1) must be pulled up while moving the shift lever.
OMG045003N
4 4
Driving your vehicle
• To shift into reverse, rest the lever in
neutral for at least 3 seconds after your
car is completely stopped. Then move
the lever into the reverse position.
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),
put the shift lever in N (Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.
✽ NOTICE
To avoid premature clutch wear and
damage, do not drive with your foot
resting on the clutch pedal. Also, don’t
use the clutch to hold the vehicle
stopped on an uphill grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.
WARNING - Manual
transaxle
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then make
sure the transaxle is shifted into 1st
gear when the vehicle is parked on
a level or uphill grade, and shifted
into R (Reverse) on a downhill
grade. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
these precautions are not followed
in the order identified.
4 5
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic transaxle operation
All normal forward driving is done with
the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.
To move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position, the brake pedal must be
depressed.
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Depress the brake pedal when shifting, if your vehicle is equipped shift lock system.
The shift lever can be moved freely.
OMG045004
4 6
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever is
in the P (PARK) position; then set
the parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
these precautions are not followed
in the order identified.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• To avoid damage to your transaxle, do
not accelerate the engine in R
(Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.
• When stopped on an uphill grade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary with
engine power. Use the service brake
or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse)
when the engine is above idle speed.
Transaxle ranges
P (Park)
This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating.
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into this position.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the P (Park) position in
place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
AND set the parking brake fully.
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position. Set the
parking brake fully, shut the
engine off and take the key with
you. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur if
you do not follow these precautions in the order specified.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
The transaxle may be damaged if you
shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you
may damage the transaxle if you shift
into R while the vehicle is in motion.
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift in the N position, the
wheels and transaxle are not locked. The
vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or
service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 5-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
4 7
Driving your vehicle
Up (+)
: Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-): Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
Automatic mode
✽ NOTICE
+ (UP)
Sports mode
- (DOWN)
OMG045005
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the “D” position
into the manual gate. To return to “D”
range operation, push the shift lever back
into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
4 8
• Upshifts do not take place automatically in sports mode. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the five forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the “R” or “P” position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into 2nd gear which
is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the (down) side to shift back to 1st gear.
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a tendency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) while
in Sport mode will help prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards.
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the Automatic Transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle out of P (Park)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to
the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
sound near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
OMG045061
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever should fail to move from
the P (Park) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
S/Lock override access hole which is
located on the right side of the shift
lever.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the access
hole and press down on the key.
3. Depress the lock release button and
move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealership immediately.
4 9
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
In the event of brake failure
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
4 10
WARNING - Parking brake
Pulling the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving at normal speeds
can cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehicle,
use great caution in applying the
brake.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may result in the vehicle not slowing down at the usual
rate and pulling to one side when
the brakes are applied. After
going through water, apply the
brakes lightly to regain smooth
braking performance.
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
✽ NOTICE
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and it's
time for new pads, you will hear a highpitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You
may hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress the
brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do not
continue to drive with worn brake pads.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
OMG045077
CAUTION
Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets to
ensure smooth brake performance.
Power adjustable pedals
(if equipped)
To adjust the position of the accelerator
and brake pedals, turn the ignition key to
the “ON” position with the selector lever
in the "P" position and push the switch.
If you push the “▲” portion of the switch,
the pedals move rearward.
If you push the “▼” portion of the switch,
the pedals move forward.
4 11
Driving your vehicle
Setting the driver's position
1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.
2. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the front most position by pushing the “▼” portion of the switch.
3. Adjust the seat position and the steering wheel angle properly.
4. Move the pedals toward you until you
can fully depress the brake pedal by
pushing the “▲” portion of the switch.
5. Depress the pedals a few times to get
used to the feel after adjusting.
WARNING - Pedal adjustment
• Adjust the pedals after parking
the vehicle on level ground. Never
attempt to adjust the pedals while
the vehicle is moving.
• Never adjust the pedals with your
foot on the accelerator pedal as
this may result in increasing the
engine speed and acceleration.
• Make sure that you can fully
depress the brake pedal before
driving. Otherwise, you may not
be able to hold down the brake
pedal firmly in an emergency
stop.
OMG045006
Parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a gtadient, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear on manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P(Park) position on automatic
transaxle vehicles.
✽ NOTICE
Driving with the parking brake applied
will cause excessive brake pad and
brake rotor wear.
4 12
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Parking brake
OMG045007
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull the parking lever
slightly.
Secondly, depress the release button
and lower the parking brake lever while
holding the button.
• To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely positioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P (Park)
for automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
• Never allow a person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle or children
to touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may
occur.
W-75
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released, there
may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.
4 13
Driving your vehicle
Parking on curbed streets
• When parking your vehicle on an uphill
grade, park as close to the curb as
possible and turn the front wheels
away from the curb so that the front
wheels will contact the curb if the vehicle moves backward.
• When parking your vehicle on a downhill grade, park as close to the curb as
possible and turn the front wheels
toward the curb so that the front
wheels will contact the curb if the vehicle moves forward.
4 14
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
WARNING - ABS Brakes
Your ABS is not a substitute for
good driving judgement. You can
still have an accident. In fact, your
ABS will probably not be able to
prevent an accident in the following
driving conditions:
• Dangerous driving, such as
neglecting safety precautions,
speeding, or driving too close to
the vehicle in front of you.
• Driving at high speed in situations providing considerably less
traction, such as wet conditions
where hydroplaning could occur.
• Driving too fast on poor road surfaces. The ABS is designed to
improve maximum braking effectiveness on typical highways and
roads in good condition. On poor
road surfaces, the ABS may actually reduce braking effectiveness.
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS repeatedly modulates the
hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your brake
pressure and do not try to pump your
brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard
as possible or as hard as the situation
warrants and allow the ABS to control the
force being delivered to the brakes.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
ABS
W-78
✽ NOTICE
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, however,
your regular brakes will work normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through selfdiagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with your
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road, and
operate your brakes continuously, the
ABS will be active continuously and
the ABS warning light may illuminate.
Pull your car over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
4 15
Driving your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Power steering (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather (below 10 °C/14 °F), the power steering may
require increased effort when the engine
is first started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the cold
weather and does not indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the engine
RPM by depressing the accelerator until
the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release
or let the engine idle for two or three
minutes to warm up the fluid.
✽ NOTICE
• Never hold the steering wheel against
a stop (extreme right or left turn) for
more than 5 seconds with the engine
running. Holding the steering wheel
for more than 5 seconds in either position may cause damage to the power
steering pump.
• If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump malfunctions, the steering effort will
greatly increase.
4 16
Tilt and telescopic steering
(if equipped)
A tilt and telescopic steering wheel
allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it to
the highest level to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.
WARNING - Steering wheel
• Never adjust the angle of steering
wheel while driving. You may lose
your steering control and cause
severe personal injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Horn
• To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
• Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharppointed object.
(if equipped)
OMG045008
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down (1) the lock release lever, adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2), then pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place.
Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to
the desired position before driving.
OMG045009
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
4 17
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without resting your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
With cruise control, you can set and
automatically maintain any speed of
between 40 km/h (24 mph) and
160 km/h (96 mph).
WARNING - Cruise
control
Do not use the cruise control feature under the following conditions:
• Heavy or unsteady traffic
• Slippery or winding roads
• Situations that involve varying
speeds
OMG045010N
To set cruise control speed:
1. Pull the CRUISE ON/OFF button on
the steering wheel, to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 40 km/h (24 mph)
and less than 160 km/h (96 mph).
WARNING - Cruise control
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated) the
cruise control can be switched on
accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when cruise control is
not in use.
4 18
OMG045011
3. Press the COAST/SET switch, located
on the steering wheel, and release it at
the speed you want. Release the accelerator at the same time. The desired
speed will automatically be maintained.
The SET function cannot be activated
until approximately 2 seconds after the
CRUISE ON/OFF button has been
engaged.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while going
downhill.
WARNING - Cruise control
Do not exceed posted speed limits.
Do not set the cruise control at a
speed that is unsafe for the current
driving conditions.
Driving your vehicle
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Press the clutch pedal with a manual
transaxle or shift into N (Neutral) with an
automatic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Press
the
COAST/SET
and
RES/ACCEL switches at the same
time.
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the “SET” indicator
light in the instrument cluster will go
OFF), but it will not turn the system off. If
you wish to resume cruise control operation, press the RES/ACCEL switch located on your steering wheel. You will return
to your previously preset speed.
• Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button on
the steering wheel (the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will
go OFF).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To Set Cruise Control
Speed” on the previous page.
OMG045012
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Press the RES/ACCEL switch and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the switch at the speed you want.
• Briefly press and release the
RES/ACCEL switch. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1
mph).
4 19
Driving your vehicle
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, press the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not
interfere with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
OMG045011
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Press the COAST/SET switch and hold
it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the switch at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Briefly press and release the
COAST/SET switch. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1
mph).
4 20
OMG045012
To resume cruising speed at
more than 40 km/h (24 mph):
If something besides the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the RES/ACCEL
switch is pressed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below 40 km/h (24
mph).
Driving your vehicle
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
ESC operation
OMG045013N
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
monitors information from various vehicle
sensors and then compares the driver's
commands with the actual behavior of the
vehicle. If an unstable condition occurs - a
sudden evasive movement for example ESC intervenes within fractions of a
second via the engine computer and
brake system and attempts to stabilize
the vehicle.
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system
self-check and does not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to
increase.
4 21
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
ESC press the ESC OFF button
OFF (ESC OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC is
off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the ESC
will automatically turn on
again.
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
ESC
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
ESC
OFF
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
either the ESC is turned off with the button, or ESC fails to operate when turned
on.
4 22
WARNING - ESC
The Electronic Stability Control system is only a driving aid; use precautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads.
Driving your vehicle
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned
on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press ESC OFF button while ESC
is operating (ESC indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.
WARNING - ESC
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC may be operating, such
as on slippery or winding roads. If
the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control. To turn ESC off while
driving, press the ESC OFF button
while driving on a flat, straight, dry
road surface.
✽ NOTICE
• When measuring the vehicle speed
with a Chassis dynamo-meter, make
sure the ESC is turned off (ESC OFF
light illuminated). If the ESC is left
on, it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and cause a false
diagnosis of a faulty speedometer.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
• When attempting to free an ESCequipped vehicle that is stuck in snow,
sand, or mud, use the ESC OFF button to temporarily deactivate the ESC
system.
4 23
Driving your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
➁
➀
➄
➁
➂
➆
➄
➃
➅
➇
➄
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer / Tripmeter
7. Shift position indicator
(Automatic transaxle only)
8. Fuel gauge
OMG047902C
4 24
Driving your vehicle
GAUGES
Speedometer
Tachometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or
ON position with the engine OFF. This
movement is normal and will not affect
the accuracy of the tachometer once the
engine is running.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
OMG045014
Tripmeter
You can choose the tripmeter A and tripmeter B by pressing the tripmeter mode
button.
TRIP A: Tripmeter A (if equipped)
TRIP B: Tripmeter B (if equipped)
The tripmeter indicates the distance of
individual trips selected by the driver.
Tripmeter A and B can be reset to 0 by
pressing the reset button for 1 second or
more, and then releasing.
✽ NOTICE
Do not operate the engine within the
tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine damage.
4 25
Driving your vehicle
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
Fuel tank capacity - 62 liters
(16.38 gallons)
The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low
fuel warning light, which will illuminate
when the fuel level has dropped to about
7~8 liters (1.8~2.1 gallons).
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in the Index.
Type A
Type B
✽ NOTICE
If the gauge pointer moves beyond the
normal range area toward the “H” position, it indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
1MGH4920N
Trip computer (if equipped)
Trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving on the
LCD.
4 26
Driving your vehicle
Type A
Type A
Type B
Type B
OMG045014
Mode
Each push of the button (TRIP) changes
the display as follows:
TRIPMETER
DRIVING TIME
AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED
DISTANCE TO EMPTY
1MGH4922
1MGH4923N
Tripmeter (km or MI)
This mode indicates the total distance
traveled since the last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 km (mile).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter is being displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero.
Driving time
This mode displays the total time elepsed
from engine start to key OFF conditions.
When the “TRIP” switch is pushed, it will
reset to 0:00.
Reset
Push “TRIP” for more than 1 second to
initialize the displayed information such
as average speed and driving time.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
4 27
Driving your vehicle
Type A
Type A
Type A
Type B
Type B
Type B
1MGH4924N
1MGH4926N
1MGH4921N
Average vehicle speed
This mode displays the average vehicle
speed, and is reset to 0 km/h (0 mph)
when the ignition key is turned OFF.
Distance to empty (km or MI)
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel in
the fuel tank. When the remaining distance is below 50 km (30 miles), a blinking “----” symbol will be displayed.
The distance to empty value will be
affected by factors such as driving conditions, driving habits, and engine condition.
Ambient temperature (°C or °F)
(if equipped)
This mode indicates the current ambient
temperature. The meter’s working range 40°C (-40°F) to 80°C (176°F)
4 28
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupted, the “DISTANCE TO EMPTY”
function may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.59 US gal) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• Trip computer provides a driver with
supplemental information about the
current operating status of your vehicle. So the estimated distance to empty
can be changed according to operating status of your vehicle, average fuel
consumption and previously driving
style. Therefore the values approved
or displayed on LCD for the first time
can be different with your vehicle’s.
• The figure of distance to empty is estimated driving distance, so it can be
different from the driving distance
really is.
OMG045015
Instrument panel illumination
(if equipped)
When the vehicle’s parking lights or headlights are on, rotate the illumination control knob to adjust the instrument panel
illumination intensity.
4 29
Driving your vehicle
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Warning lights / audible indicators
Checking operation
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light (if
equipped)
ABS
This light illuminates if the key is turned
to ON and goes off in approximately 3
seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
4 30
Electronic brake force
distribution (EBD) system warning
(if equipped)
ABS
If ABS and BRAKE warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving, your
vehicle has a problem with the ABS and
EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING - Brake indicators
If the both ABS and Brake warning
lights are ON and stay ON, your
vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally. You may experience an
unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking. Have your vehicle
checked by Authorized Kia Dealer
as soon as possible.
Engine oil pressure
warning
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine is not stopped immediately,
severe damage could result.
Driving your vehicle
Charging system
warning
Safety belt warning
Shift pattern indicators
(if equipped)
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
Kia dealer correct the problem as soon
as possible.
As a reminder to the driver and passenger, safety belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON.
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when the key is turned ON or if it is
disconnected after the key is turned ON,
the safety belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds.
If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when you drive over 10 km/h, the
safety belt warning light will blink for 6
seconds. This cycle will repeat 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds between
cycles.
If the system does not operate as
described, see an authorized Kia dealer
for assistance.
The individual indicators illuminate to
show the automatic transaxle shift lever
selection.
Hot temperature
warning (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the temperature of the engine coolant is hot.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in the Index.
✽ NOTICE
If the hot temperature indicator illuminates, it indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
4 31
Driving your vehicle
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
This light illuminates when the immobilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON
position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
light goes out after the engine is running.
In case this light goes out before you
start the engine, you must turn to the
LOCK position and restart the engine.
If this light blinks when the ignition switch
is in the ON position before starting the
engine, have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
4 32
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have it towed to any authorized Kia
dealer for a brake system inspection
and necessary repairs.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a brake
warning light on is dangerous. If the
brake warning light remains on,
have the brakes checked and
repaired immediately by an authorized Kia dealer.
Driving your vehicle
Trunk lid open
warning (if equipped)
Headlight high beam
indicator
Malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
CHECK
This warning light activates when the
trunk is not closed securely.
Door ajar warning
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely.
Low fuel level
warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. The warning light will
come on when the fuel level has dropped
to about 7~8 liters (1.8~2.1 gallons).
Refuel as soon as possible.
This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Air bag warning
(if equipped)
AIR
BAG
This warning light will blink or illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
If this indicator does not go out, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
see an authorized Kia dealer for immediate service.
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable and will not need towing, but
have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
A loose fuel filler cap may cause the On
Board Diagnostic System Malfunction
Indicator Light ( ) in the instrument
panel to illuminate unnecessarily.
Always make sure that the fuel filler cap
is tight.
4 33
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• Prolonged driving with the Emission
Control
System
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (
) illuminated
may cause damage to the emission
control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.
• If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (
)
begins to flash ON and OFF, potential
catalytic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of engine
power. Have the Engine Control
System inspected as soon as possible by
an authorized Kia dealer.
CHECK
CHECK
ESC indicator
(Electronic Stability
Control) (if equipped)
ESC
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions and under normal
driving conditions, the ESC light will
remain off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
ESC OFF indicator
(if equipped)
ESC
OFF
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated. If this indicator
stays on in the ESC ON mode, the ESC
may have a malfunction. Take your car to
the authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
4 34
Front fog light
indicator (if equipped)
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Auto cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
CRUISE
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
SET indicator
SET
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise function switch (COAST/ SET or
RES/ACCEL) is ON.
Driving your vehicle
Safety belt warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned “ON” or if
it is disconnected after the key is turn
ON, the safety belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds.
If the driver’s lap/shoulder belt is not fastened when you drive over 10 km/h, the
safety belt warning chime will sound for 6
seconds. This cycle will repeat 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds between
cycles.
Key reminder warning chime
(if equipped)
If the driver’s door is opened and the ignition key is left in the ignition switch, the
key reminder warning chime will sound.
This is to help prevent you from locking
your keys in the vehicle.
4 35
Driving your vehicle
COMPASS - Z-NAV™ COMPASS (IF EQUIPPED)
B520C01MG
1. ON/OFF button
2. Heading display
4 36
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn the
display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the
button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the
button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with press
and hold sequences of the
button
and are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic
north and true north. The compass in the
mirror can compensate for this difference
when it knows the Magnetic Zone in
which it is operating. This is set either by
the dealer or by the user. The operating
Zone Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure to the right.
B520C05NF
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone Number
based upon your current location on
the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the
button for
more than 3 but less than 6 seconds,
the current Zone Number will appear
on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the
button
again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,
15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button
when the desired Zone Number
appears on the display will set the new
Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass
will start displaying a compass heading again.
Driving your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle magnets.
Items such as installing a ski rack or a
CB antenna or even some body repair
work on the vehicle can cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In these
situations, the compass will need to be
re-calibrated to quickly correct for these
changes. To re-calibrate the compass:
1. Press and hold the
button for
more than 6 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will
appear in the display.
2. To calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 8 Km/h (5 mph).
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before
backing up.
OMG045017
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
4 37
Driving your vehicle
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition key ON.
If the vehicle is moved at speed over
5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not
activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Rear parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water, or the sensor
cover is blocked. (It will operate normally when the material is removed or
the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7. Sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47
in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper :
Buzzer beeps intermittently
• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31
in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper :
Buzzer beeps more frequently
• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)
of the rear bumper : Buzzer sounds
continuously.
4 38
Detecting range may decrease when:
1. Sensor is stained with foreign matter
such as snow or water. (Sensing range
will return to normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
Following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb sensor
frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)
in diameter.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
1. The rear parking assist system
may not sound sequentially
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
2. The rear parking assist system
may malfunction if the vehicle
bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged. Any non-factory installed
equipment or accessories may
also interfere with the sensor performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize
objects less than 40 cm (15 in.)
from the sensor, or it may sense
an incorrect distance. Use caution.
4. When sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, sensor
may be inoperative until the
stains are removed using a soft
cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
CAUTION
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors; It can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim
objects, such as poles or objects
located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when driving back up.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or its occupants due to
rear parking assist system malfunction. Always drive safely and cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians,
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
✽ NOTICE
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to “R” position, this may indicate a malfunction in
the rear parking assist system. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
4 39
Driving your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the headlights and parking
lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver- side
door.
• With this feature, the parklight will be
turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on when
the ignition key is removed, perform the
following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
4 40
OMG045018C
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
OMG045019
Parking light position (
)
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail, position, license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
Driving your vehicle
OMG045020
Headlight position (
)
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position) the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights are ON.
OMG045022
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
OMG045023
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
4 41
Driving your vehicle
Lane change signals (B)
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position.
The lever will return to the OFF position
when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
✽ NOTICE
OMG045024
Turn signals (A)
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down.
Green arrow indicators on the instrument
panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, the bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
OMG045025
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility and avoid accidents when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to ON (2) after the
headlight switch is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch
to OFF.
✽ NOTICE
When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical
power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor. Unnecessary battery and
generator drain could occur if the fog
lights are used excessively.
4 42
Driving your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will make your highbeam headlights turn OFF when:
1. The head light switch is ON.
2. The parking brake engaged.
3. Engine stops.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push
the lever forward and release it
with the lever in the OFF position.
The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed
upward and held.
✽ NOTICE
OMG045028L
Windshield wipers
Type A
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist. To
vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1). (S : slow
operation, F: fast operation)
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
✽ NOTICE
• To prevent possible damage to the
wipers or windshield, do not operate
the wipers when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene,
paint thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
4 43
Driving your vehicle
If the ignition switch is turned ON when
the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode, or
wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when
the ignition switch is ON, wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the
system. Set the wiper to OFF position
when the wiper is not in use.
Sensor
OMG045029L
Type B
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
OFF/LO/HI/MIST: See the explanation
for type A operation.
AUTO (if equipped)
; The rain sensor located on the upper
end of windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper intervals. The
more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wiper
stops. To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (1). (S : slow
operation, F: fast operation.)
4 44
✽ NOTICE
When washing the vehicle, set the wiper
switch in the OFF position to stop the
auto wiper operation.
Wiper may operate and be damaged if
the switch is set in AUTO mode while
washing vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover located
on the upper end of the passenger side
windshield glass. Damage to system
parts could occur and may not be covered by you vehicle warranty.
When the starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF position.
Otherwise, wipers may operate and ice
may damage the windshield wiper
blades. Always remove all snow and ice
and defrost the windshield properly
prior to operating the windshield
wipers.
Driving your vehicle
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use caution in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the windshield glass.
✽ NOTICE
OMG045032L
To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer
when the fluid reservoir is empty.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 2-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
4 45
Driving your vehicle
DEFROSTER
✽ NOTICE
Type A
OMG045033N
Type B
OMG045034
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while the engine is running.
4 46
• To prevent damage to the conductors
bonded to the inside surface of the
rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
• To prevent the battery from being discharged, the rear window defroster
will only operate when the engine is
running.
• If you want to defrost and defog on
the front windshield, refer to
“Windshield
Defrosting
and
Defogging” in this section.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button again.
Outside mirror heater
(if equipped)
There is no control button for the outside
mirror heater; instead the outside mirror
heater automatically turns on when the
rear window defroster is turned on.
Driving your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OMG045100
OMG065001
Front windshield deicer (if equipped)
To activate the front windshield deicer,
press the front windshield deicer button.
The indicator on the button illuminates
when the deicer is ON.
The front windshield deicer automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the
defroster, press the front windshield
deicer button again.
The front windshield deicer is designed
to defrost wiper blades. If you want to
defrost and defog on the front windshield, refer to “Windshield Defrosting
and Defogging” in this section.
The hazard warning flasher causes the
rear tail lights and front turn signal lights
to flash on and off, which serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise caution when approaching or passing your
vehicle.
To activate the flasher, depress the hazard warning flasher switch. This switch
operates in any ignition switch position.
To turn the flashers off, depress the
switch again.
4 47
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Air intake control button
3. Mode selection knob
4. Temperature control knob
5. Air conditioning button
(if equipped)
OMG045069N
4 48
Driving your vehicle
OMG045071N
OMG045037
OMG045037N
Fan speed control knob
Temperature control knob
Mode selection knob
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the mode selection knob to the
OFF position turns off the fan.
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment turn the knob to the
right for warm and hot air or left for cooler air.
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
The steps (•) between the air flow positions represent a midpoint between
those positions.
4 49
Driving your vehicle
MAX/ A/C position
When you select the MAX
MAX A/C mode while the fan is on,
A/C the following system settings
will be made automatically;
• the air conditioning system
will be turned on.
• the recirculated air position
will be selected.
• the face mode will be
selected.
If you select MAX A/C mode,
you will not be able to cancel
the A/C system operation, or
change the recirculated air
mode position.
Set the fan speed control
knob to the desired speed
and rotate the temperature
control knob to the extreme
left position for maximum
cooling.
(outlet port: B, D)
OMG045039
4 50
Driving your vehicle
Face position
Air flow is directed toward the
upper body and face.
Additionally, each outlet can
be controlled to direct the air
discharged from the outlet.
(outlet port: B, D)
Floor position
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small
amount of the air being
directed to the windshield
and side window defroster.
(outlet port: C, E, A, D)
Face - floor position
Air flow is directed towards
the face and the floor. The air
to the floor is warmer than
the air to the face (except
when the temperature control
is set to the extreme cold
position).
(outlet port: B, C, E, D)
Floor - defrost position
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window
defrosters.
(outlet port: A, C, E, D)
Defrost position
Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a
small amount of air directed
to
the
side
window
defrosters.
(outlet port: A, D)
OMG045040
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The outlet
port (B, D) can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
The air from outlet port (D) flows at any
mode. Close the ventilation outlets using
the thumbwheel to block the air flow.
4 51
Driving your vehicle
OMG045041
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
Use this position only for
short period with the recirculated air position selected, air
from passenger compartment will be drawn through
the climate control system
and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Air intake control button
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the “recirculated air position”
selected, will result in excessively dry air
in the passenger compartment.
4 52
WARNING - Recirculated
air
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air
conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can slightly reduce oxygen levels which can lead to
cause drowsiness or sleepiness,
and loss of vehicle control. Set
the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much
as possible while driving.
Driving your vehicle
OMG045042N
Air conditioning button
(if equipped)
Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Push the button again to turn the
air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
position.
,
to the
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant which is not damaging to the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
✽ NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be run
with the windows closed.
4 53
Driving your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of windows on rainy or humid days, decrease
the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month if only for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even pudding) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
4 54
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position does
provide maximum cooling, however,
continual operation in this mode may
cause the air inside the vehicle to
become stale.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer. Improper service may cause
serious injury to the person performing the service.
✽ NOTICE
When the performance of the air conditioning system is reduced it is important
that the correct type and amount of oil
and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Fan speed control knob
4. Mode selection button
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defrost button
7. Rear windshield defrost button
8. Air intake control button
9. Air conditioning button
10. Indicator light
OMG045043N
4 55
Driving your vehicle
OMG045044
Automatic operation
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows;
1. Push the AUTO button. It is indicated
by AUTO on the display. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically
based on temperature setting.
4 56
2. Turn the TEMP knob to set the desired
temperature.
If the temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously.
3. To turn the automatic operation off,
press any button except temperature
control button and AQS button (if
equipped). If you press the mode
selection button, air-conditioning button, defrost button, air intake control
button or fan speed button, the selected function will be controlled manually
while other functions operate automatically.
Regardless of the temperature setting,
when using automatic operation, the air
conditioning system will automatically
turn on to decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle, even if the temperature is set
to warm.
OMG045045
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
Driving your vehicle
Manual operation
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually as well by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button. In
this case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons selected.
When pressing any button except AUTO
button while automatic operation, the
functions of the buttons not selected will
be controlled automatically.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode will
display metric units.
This is normal condition and you can
switch the temperature mode between
Celsius to Fahrenheit as follows;
While depressing the OFF button,
depress the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Celsius to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit
to Celsius.
OMG045046
Temperature control knob
The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the right
extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the left
extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
4 57
Driving your vehicle
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
✽ NOTICE
OMG045047
OMG045062
Fan speed control knob
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by turning the fan speed control
knob.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air intake control button
This is used to select outside (fresh) air
position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
Use this position only for
short period with the recirculated air position selected, air
from passenger compartment will be drawn through
the climate control system
and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
4 58
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the “recirculated air position”
selected, will result in excessively dry air
in the passenger compartment.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Recirculated air
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air
conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can slightly reduce oxygen levels which can lead to
cause drowsiness or sleepiness,
and loss of vehicle control. Set
the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much
as possible while driving.
OMG045039
4 59
Driving your vehicle
Face position
Air flow is directed toward the
upper body and face.
Additionally, each outlet can
be controlled to direct the air
discharged from the outlet.
(outlet port: B, D)
OMG045050
Mode selection button
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port changes as follows:
Face - floor position
Air flow is directed towards
the face and the floor. The air
to the floor is warmer than
the
air
to
the
face
(except when the temperature control is set to the
extreme
cold
position).
(outlet port: B, C, E, D)
Floor position
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small
amount of the air being
directed to the windshield
and side window defroster.
(outlet port: C, E, A, D)
Floor - defrost position
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window
defrosters.
(outlet port: A, C, E, D)
4 60
OMG045068
Defrost button
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
(outlet port: A, D)
Driving your vehicle
OMG045040
OMG045052
OMG045053
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the instrument panel vents. The outlet
port (B, D) can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
The air from outlet port (D) flows at any
mode. Close the ventilation outlets using
the thumbwheel to block the air flow if
you do not want the air.
Air conditioning button
Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.
OFF button
Push the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However you can
still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is ON.
4 61
Driving your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of windows on rainy humid days, decrease
the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles on.
This is a normal system operation
characteristics.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month if only for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even pudding) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristics.
4 62
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position does
provide maximum cooling, however,
continual operation in this mode may
cause the air inside the vehicle to
become stale.
✽ NOTICE
When using the air conditioning system,
monitor the temperature gauge closely
while driving up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation may
cause engine overheating. Continue to
use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer. Improper service may cause
serious injury.
✽ NOTICE
When the performance of the air conditioning system is reduced it is important
that the correct type and amount of oil
and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
Driving your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
CAUTION - Windshield
heating
OMG045055N
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected.
If the outside (fresh) air position is not
selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
OMG045056N
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the right position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected.
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
to the
position and fan speed
control knob to the lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield.
4 63
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION - Windshield
heating
OMG045057N
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired temperature.
2. Press the defrost button (
).
3. The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position and
higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually.
4 64
OMG045058N
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest (extreme
right) position.
2. Set temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
to the
position and fan speed
control knob to the lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme highest
temperature setting and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield.
Driving your vehicle
Defogging logic
Manual climate control system
To reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
control is set to the outside (fresh) air
position automatically if any of following
occur.
• The mode is set to the
,
or
while the ignition switch is turned on.
• The ignition switch is turned off.
• The fan is off.
Press the air intake control button to
select the recirculated air position while
the ignition switch is on.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button (
) will blink 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it is reset to the defog logic
status.
OMG045063N
How to cancel or return defogging logic
of manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position (
).
3. Push the air intake control button
(
) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
4 65
Driving your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
To reduce the probability of fogging up
inside of the windshield, the air intake
control is set to outside (fresh) air position automatically if any of following
occur.
• The ignition switch is turned on while
the mode is selected to the
,
,
.
• The OFF button is pushed.
• The mode is selected to the
or
position.
If you don’t want the outside (fresh) air
position, press the corresponding button
to cancel the operation.
4 66
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it is reset to the defog logic
status.
OMG045064
How to cancel or return defogging logic
of automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Select the defrost position pressing
defrost button (
).
3. While holding the air conditioning button (A/C) pressed, press the air intake
control button (
) at least 5 times
within 3 seconds.
Fuel requirements / 5-2
Emission control system / 5-2
Before driving / 5-4
Suggestions for economical operation / 5-5
Special driving conditions / 5-6
Trailer towing / 5-9
Overloading / 5-14
Label information / 5-15
Driving tips
5
Driving tips
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline engine (unleaded)
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel with a minimum
Octane Rating of 87 Anti-Knock Index
(AKI).
✽ NOTICE
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use
of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the
engine control system’s oxygen sensor
and affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than what
Kia has specified. (Consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer for details.)
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.
5 2
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
✽ NOTICE
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs drivability.
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty &
Consumer Information Manual in your
vehicle.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your Kia could affect its
performance, safety or durability, may
violate governmental safety and emissions regulations, and void the vehicle’s
warranty.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions following to
avoid CO impairment.
Driving tips
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to re-start the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such as
grass, vegetation, paper, leaves,
etc.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gasoline engine (unleaded).
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
5 3
Driving tips
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle:
Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in
Section 7, Maintenance.
5 4
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or take
drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
Driving tips
SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
kilometers (miles) you can get from a liter
(gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling. Once the
engine is running smoothly, begin driving. Remember, engine warm-up may
take a little longer on cold days.
• Save fuel by accelerating slowly after
stopping.
• Keep the engine in tune and follow the
recommended periodic maintenance
schedule. This will increase the life of
all parts and lower your operating
costs.
• Do not use the air conditioner unnecessarily.
• Slow down when driving on rough
roads.
• For longer tire life and better fuel economy, always keep the tires inflated to
the recommended pressures.
• Maintain a safe distance from other
vehicles to avoid sudden stops. This
will reduce wear on brake linings and
pads. Driving in such a way will also
save fuel because extra fuel is required
to accelerate back to driving speed.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in the
vehicle.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
needless wear, possible damage to the
brakes, and poor fuel economy.
• Improper wheel alignment results in
faster tire wear and lower fuel economy.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
WARNING - Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia
dealer perform scheduled inspections
and maintenance.
5 5
Driving tips
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light upand-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
CAUTION - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1 (First) and
R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a
manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped with
an automatic transaxle. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little as
possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged rocking may cause engine
over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat,
explode and injure bystanders.
5 6
Driving tips
Driving at night
Driving in the rain
Winter driving
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking operation returns.
• We recommend that you carry emergency equipment, including a window
scraper, windshield de-icer, a bag of
sand or salt, flares, a small shovel and
jumper cables.
• Make sure you have sufficient ethylene-glycol coolant in the radiator.
• Check the battery condition and
cables. Cold temperatures reduce the
output capability of any battery, so it
must be in excellent condition to provide enough winter starting power.
• Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for cold weather.
• Check the ignition system for loose
connections and damage.
• Use antifreeze-formulated windshield
washer fluid. (Do not use engine
coolant antifreeze.)
• Do not use the parking brake if it might
freeze. When parking, shift to 1 (First)
or R (Reverse) with a manual transaxle
or P (Park) with an automatic transaxle
and block the rear wheels.
5 7
Driving tips
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your Kia,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and
handling of your vehicle may be
adversely affected.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against
their use.
5 8
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving tips
TRAILER TOWING
Engine
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equipment or you drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may fail, and
would at least be ineffective to
promptly stop the vehicle. You and
your passengers could be seriously
or fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
Item
Without trailer brakes
kg (lbs.) With trailer brakes
Maximum permissible static vertical
load on the coupling device
kg (lbs.)
2.7 Engine
AT
AT*2
454 (1000)
*3
454 (1000)
907 (2000)
*3
907 (2000)
80 (176)
*3
80 (176)
MT
Maximum trailer
weight
2.4 Engine
*1
*2
*1 MT : Manual transaxle
*2 AT : Automatic transaxle
*3 : Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
✽ NOTICE
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs
not covered by your warranty.
To identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you should
refer to the chart on this page.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering causes major changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires correct equipment, and cautious driving.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
5 9
Driving tips
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat
which creates more wear in engine, and
a shortened engine life. The trailer also
adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Do not attach a trailer hitch which
requires you to alter other parts on
your vehicle.
• Never make a hole in your vehicle to
accommodate a hitch.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a framemounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
5 10
WARNING
If you damage the body of your car,
installing, or using a trailer hitch,
you must have any resulting hole
immediately repaired, An unsealed
hole can allow deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
into your vehicle.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer weighs more than the maximum weight for a trailer without brakes,
then the trailer needs its own brakes. You
must consult with a knowledgeable and
reputabel trailer vendor to determine
which brake equipped trailer is right for
your needs. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system pursuant to
the trailer manufacture’s instructions. This is not a task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for this work.
WARNING - Trailer and
vehicle brakes
NEVER connect or allow anyone
else to connect your vehicle’s
brakes to any trailer brake system.
Altering your vehicle’s brakes could
result in total brake failure.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience. You
must gain that experience slowly and
carefully which practicing with an
unloaded or lightly loaded trailer. Before
setting out for the open road, you must
get to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself
with the feel of handling and braking with
the trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly so responsive
as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has brakes, follow the trailer manufacturer’s instructions
as to how to check the brakes before you
start driving.
During your trip, stop every hour or so to
be sure that the load is secure, and that
the lights and any trailer brakes are working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
The trailer will go in the opposite direction of the rear of your vehicle when
backing up. This is very difficult for an
inexperienced trailer driver to get used
to. To help you avoid mistakes, hold the
bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just hold the steering wheel firmly and
move your hand to the left. To move the
trailer to the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.
Your Authorized Kia Dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
WARNING - Trailer wiring
harness
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in an
accident due to the failure of the
trailer lights to operate.
5 11
Driving tips
✽ NOTICE
Failure to sue a trailer wiring harness
can damage your vehicle’s electrical system.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45
mph) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
CAUTION
When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat. If the
needle of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down. You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
Parking on hills
Generally, you should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
People can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can
be damaged if they begin a downhill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here’s how to do it:
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached is dangerous. It
could cause serious injury or death,
should the trailer break lose, or
should the trailer drag the vehicle
downhill.
5 12
1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift into
gear.
2. Have someone place chocks (blocks
of wood or metal intended for this purpose) under the downhill sides of the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place,
release the brakes until the chocks
absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your parking brake, and then shift to P (Park) for
an automatic transaxle.
5. Release the brakes.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set or if the engine is still
running.
In either case the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
Driving tips
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold the
brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly forward until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
✽ NOTICE
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur in hot
days or during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates over-heating,
switch off the A/C and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle fluid
more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with
the air conditioner, you should install
a condenser fan to improve engine
performance when towing a trailer.
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• After your odometer indicates 800 km
(500 miles) or more, you can tow a
trailer. For the first 800 km (500 miles)
that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over
80 km/h (50 mph) and don’t make
starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle
“wear” in at the heavier loads.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60
mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The important considerations have to
do with weight:
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But
even that can be too heavy. If you feel that
the trailer is adversely affecting the movement of your vehicle, reduce your speed,
avoid uneven or winding roads, avoid
roads with steep grades, and/or lighten
your trailer load.
5 13
Driving tips
OVERLOADING
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle since that is the
trailer weight pushing down on the hitch
on your vehicle. The rest of the trailer
weight is sitting on the trailer’s wheels.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight. After you've loaded the trailer, go
to a Weigh Station and weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if
the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you
may be able to correct them simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
5 14
WARNING - Trailer balance
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in excessive
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the manufacturer's label
attached to the driver's door.
Exceeding these ratings can cause
an accident or vehicle damage. You
can calculate the weight of your
load by weighing the items (and
people) before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to overload
your vehicle.
Driving tips
LABEL INFORMATION
There are several important labels and
identification numbers located on your
vehicle. The label locations are identified
in the illustrations shown.
Frame number
VIN (if equipped)
OMG055001
Identification label (if equipped)
Type A
Type B
OMG055003
Compliance label (if equipped)
OMG055004
OMG055002
Vehicle identification number
(VIN)
VIN bar code (if equipped)
Type B
Type A
To check the frame number under the
passenger seat, remove the cover.
OMG055005
5 15
Driving tips
2.4 Gasoline engine
OMG057007
OMG055004N
2.7 Gasoline engine
Tire specification / pressure label
OMG057008
Engine number
5 16
Road warning / 6-2
Overheating / 6-2
Emergency starting / 6-3
Electrical circuit protection / 6-6
Towing / 6-13
If you have a flat tire / 6-18
In case of an emergency
6
In case of an emergency
ROAD WARNING
OVERHEATING
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
OMG065001
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle. It
should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
6 2
If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of
power, or if you hear a loud knocking or
pinging noise, the engine has probably
overheated. Should any of these symptoms occur, use the following procedure:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,
then drive to the nearest safe location
and stop your vehicle; set the automatic transaxle in P (Park), or shift the
manual transaxle to N (Neutral) and
apply the parking brake.
2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.
3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator, stop the engine and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
If coolant is not boiling out, allow the
engine to idle and open the hood to
permit the engine to cool gradually.
If the temperature does not go down
with the engine idling, stop the engine
and allow sufficient time for it to cool.
In case of an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
4. The coolant level should then be
checked. If the level in the reservoir is
low, look for leaks at the radiator hoses
and connections, heater hoses and
connections, radiator, and water
pump. If you find a major leak or another problem that may have caused the
engine to overheat, do not operate the
engine until it has been corrected. Call
an authorized Kia dealer for assistance. If you do not find a leak or other
problem, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir.
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam
may blow out under pressure. This
could cause serious injury.
If the engine frequently overheats, have
the cooling system checked and repaired
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You
can damage a 12-volt starting motor,
ignition system, and other electrical
parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt
power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator
set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
6 3
In case of an emergency
Connecting jumper cables
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jumper Cables
Discharged battery
Booster battery
OMG065002
6 4
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Remove the engine cover.
5. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the previous illustration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2).
6. Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked. Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
In case of an emergency
Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground.
Do not lean over the battery when
making connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
CAUTION
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
6 5
In case of an emergency
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Normal
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
Blown
1VQA4037
Fuses
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
6 6
This vehicle has two fuse panels, one
located in the driver's side panel bolster,
the other in the engine compartment
near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Two kinds of fuses are used: standard for
lower amperage rating and main for higher amperage ratings.
Fuse replacement
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage through overheating and possibly a fire.
• Never install a wire instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and possibly a
fire.
✽ NOTICE
Do not use a screwdriver or any other
metal object to remove fuses because it
may cause a short circuit and damage
the system.
In case of an emergency
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the audio fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse block in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
OMG065003
OMG065004
Driver-side panel bolster
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool (1) provided in
the engine compartment fuse/relay
box.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the fuse
panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
6 7
In case of an emergency
✽ NOTICE
After checking the fuse box in the engine
compartment, securely install the fuse
box cover. If not, electrical failures may
occur from water leaking in.
OMG065005
OMG065019
Engine compartment
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by pressing the taps and pulling up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Main fuse
If the MAIN fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the MAIN fuse is blown, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
6 8
In case of an emergency
Engine compartment
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay
label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Engine compartment
OMG065006
Description
I/P B+ 2
ABS 2
DRL
HORN
H/LP LOW
F/PUMP
H/LP HI
ECU
ABS 1
ALT
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
FRT FOG
ECU RELAY
POWER AMP
SPARE
SPARE
P/OUTLET
RAD FAN
PCU
ABS
S/WARMER
ATM
S/ROOF
SPARE
Fuse rating
Protected component
50A
40A
15A
15A
15A
20A
15A
10A
40A
125A (150A)*
10A
15A
20A
15A
30A
20A
15A
20A
25A
30A (40A)*
10A
In panel B+
ABS
Daytime running light
Horn
Headlight (low)
Fuel pump
Headlight (high)
Engine control unit
ABS
Alternator
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Front fog light
Engine control unit
Amplifier
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Power outlet
Radiator fan
Power train control system sensors, TCU
ABS
Seat warmer
Automatic transaxle control
Sunroof
Spare fuse
10A
25A
20A
20A
20A
6 9
In case of an emergency
Description
Fuse rating
Protected component
BACK UP
RR HTD
IGN 1
B+
TAIL
A/CON
ECU-1
IGN COIL
SNSR 3
BLOWER
IGN 2
SNSR 2
SNSR 1
HORN RELAY
HDLP_LOW RELAY
RAD FAN_HI RELAY
RAD FAN_LOW RELAY
F/PUMP RELAY
WIPER RELAY
MAIN RELAY
START RELAY
ATM CONT RELAY
A/CON RELAY
10A
40A
30A
30A
20A
10A
20A
20A
10A
40A
30A
15A
15A
-
Back-up light
Rear window defroster
Ignition
In pannel B+
Taillight
Air conditioner
Engine control unit
Ignition coil
Sensors
Blower
Ignition
Sensors
Sensors
Horn relay
Headlight (low) relay
Radiator fan relay
Radiator fan relay
Fuel pump relay
Wiper relay
Main relay
Start motor relay
Automatic transaxle control relay
Air conditioner relay
* : if equipped
6 10
Driver-side knee bolster
OMG065007
In case of an emergency
Driver-side knee bolster
Description
H/LP
A/CON SW
START
P/SEAT RH
P/WDW RH
WIPER
MIRR HTD
RR FOG
P/SEAT LH
P/WDW LH
SPARE
MODULE-2
W/DEICER
TAIL RH
TAIL LH
EPS
A/CON
SAFETY PWR
A/BAG IND
A/BAG
DR LOCK
SPARE
CLUSTER
MODULE-1
Fuse rating
Protected component
10A
10A
10A
30A
25A
25A
10A
15A
30A
25A
10A
10A
15A
10A
10A
10A
10A
20A
10A
15A
25A
10A
10A
10A
Headlight
Air conditioner
Start motor
Power seat (right)
Power window (right)
Front wiper
Outside rearview mirror defroster
Rear fog light
Power seat (left)
Power window (left)
Spare fuse
Cluster
Deicer
Taillight (right)
Taillight (left)
Power steering wheel
Air conditioner
Safety power window
Airbag warning
Airbag
Central door lock
Spare fuse
Cluster
BWS buzzer, ESP switch
Description
Fuse rating
HAZARD
STOP LP
SPARE
TELL TALE
T/LID OPEN
ADJ PEDAL
SPARE
T/SIG
TPMS
BLOWER MTR
MEMORY
15A
15A
15A
10A
15A
10A
15A
10A
10A
10A
15A
AUDIO
C/LIGHTER
D/CLOCK
15A
25A
10A
Protected component
Hazard warning light
Stop light
Spare fuse
Clock
Trunk lid opener
Adjust pedal relay
Spare fuse
Turn signal light
TPMS
Blower, Air conditioner
Cluster, ETACS, A/C, Clock,
Room lamp
Audio
Cigar lighter
Clock
6 11
In case of an emergency
✽ NOTICE
• If the memory fuses are pulled up
from the fuse panel, the warning
chime, audio, clock and interior
lamps, etc., will not operate. Some
items must be reset after replacement.
• Even though the memory fuses are
pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.
OMG065008
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with memory
fuses to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged period.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver-side knee bolster
cover and pull up the “MEMORY 15A /
AUDIO 15A”.
6 12
In case of an emergency
TOWING
OMG065024
1JBA6501
1JBA6502
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck
service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage
to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed equipment is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
OMG065025
✽ NOTICE
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.
6 13
In case of an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Tie-down hook
✽ NOTICE
Failure to place the transaxle shift lever
in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.
OMG065009/OMG065010
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing)
CAUTION
Do not use the hooks under the front of the vehicle for towing purposes.
These hooks are designed ONLY for transport tie-down. If the tie-down hooks
are used for towing, the tie-down hooks will be damaged and this could lead
to serious injury.
6 14
In case of an emergency
• Front
2
1
OMG065012
OMG065011
Front towing hook
1. Open the trunk lid, and remove the
towing hook from the tool bag.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper (1).
OMG065012
• Rear
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured (2).
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
OMG065013
Towing with a vehicle other than
a tow truck
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
6 15
In case of an emergency
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front or rear of the vehicle. Use
extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it
and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.
✽ NOTICE
• Attach a towing strap to the tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle other
than the tow hooks for towing may
damage the body of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
6 16
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or damage.
• If the towing vehicle does not move
easily, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck
service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
1JBA4124
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
In case of an emergency
When your vehicle is being towed
by another vehicle other than a tow
truck (in case of an emergency)
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxles should not exceed 45 km/h
(28 mph) and should not be towed
more than 80 km (50 miles).
• Vehicles equipped with manual
transaxle should not be towed in
excess of 88 km/h (55 mph) and
should not be towed more than 645 km
(400 miles).
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
✽ NOTICE
To prevent internal damage to the
transaxle, never tow your vehicle from
the rear (backwards) with all four tires
in contact with the surface.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle
The following methods are effective
when your vehicle is stuck in mud, sand
or similar substances that prevent the
vehicle from being driven out under its
own power.
• Remove the soil and sand, etc. from
the front and the back of the tires.
• Place a stone or wood under the tires.
6 17
In case of an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Important - use of compact
spare tire
your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regular-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
CAUTION - Compact
OMG065014
The spare tire, jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the luggage compartment. Remove
the luggage under tray out of the way
to reach this equipment.
6 18
OMG065015
Removing the spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
spare
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
In case of an emergency
CAUTION - Compact
spare
This spare tire should be used
only for VERY short distances.
Compact spares should NEVER
be used for long drives or
extended distances.
The compact spare should be inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maximum load rating or the load-carrying capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take the vehicle through an
automatic car wash with a compact
spare.
• Do not use tire chains on this tire.
Because of the smaller size, a tire
chain will not fit properly. This could
damage the vehicle and result in
loss of the chain.
• This tire should not be installed on
the front axle if the vehicle must be
driven in snow or on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
6 19
In case of an emergency
Changing tires
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing
tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a towing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
(Continued)
6 20
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
1JBA6021
Tire replacement
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
In case of an emergency
WARNING - Changing a tire
1JBA6504
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully, and
always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being
changed.
• It is recommended that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
should remain in a vehicle that
is being jacked.
OMG065016
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
6 21
In case of an emergency
1JBA6025
OMG065017
OMG065018
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Remove the wheel lug nuts by
turning them counterclockwise,
then remove the wheel.
10. Mount the spare tire into position
and install the wheel lug nuts
with the beveled edge inward.
11. Once the wheel lug nuts have
been tightened, lower the vehicle
fully to the ground and continue to
tighten the lug nuts until they are
fully secured. Tighten the wheel
lug nuts firmly in a “star” pattern.
If you are unsure of the tightness
of the wheel lug nuts, have them
checked at the nearest service
station. The specified tightening
torque is 9~11 kg•m (65-79 lb•ft,
88-107 N•m). Improperly tightened wheel lug nuts could cause
brake pedal vibration while braking.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
6 22
In case of an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts
removed are reinstalled - or, if
replaced, that nuts with metric
threads and the same chamfer
configuration
are
used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
6 23
Maintenance services / 7-2
Maintenance schedule / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-7
Engine compartment / 7-9
Engine oil / 7-11
Engine cooling system / 7-12
Brake fluid / 7-14
Drive belts / 7-15
Power steering / 7-15
Automatic transaxle / 7-16
Lubricants and fluids / 7-17
Air cleaner / 7-18
Climate control air filter / 7-19
Wiper blades / 7-20
Battery / 7-21
Tires and wheels / 7-24
Maintenance
Lubricant specifications / 7-35
Exterior care / 7-36
Interior care / 7-38
7
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized Kia dealer perform
this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle properly. For
expert advice and quality service, see an
authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
7 2
Owner’s responsibility
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your Kia warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Warranty & Consumer Information
manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We strongly recommend that all vehicle
maintenance be performed by an authorized Kia dealer using genuine Kia parts.
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Engine control system
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Engine oil & engine oil filter
Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first
× 1,000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
104
112
120
128
# Months
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
(1)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Drive belts (tension)
I
Cooling system hoses & connections
Engine coolant
(1)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
Fuel filter
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
R
Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses
I
(2)
I
I
I
Ignition wires
I
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
Spark plugs (Iridium coated)
I
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
Fuel tank air filter
Air cleaner element
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 160,000 km
Idle speed
I
I
I
I
Engine timing belt
2.7 Engine
R
Valve clearance
(3)
I
I
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)
Chassis and body
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first
× 1,000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
104
112
120
128
# Months
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
Air conditioner compressor operation &
I
I
I
I
I
refrigerant amount (if equipped)
Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings
I
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brakes/clutch fluid
(1)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
Front brake pads & discs
(4)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rear brake pads & discs
(4)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
Brake lines & connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(including booster)
Manual transaxle oil
Clutch & brake pedal free play
7 4
(1)
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)
Chassis and body (Continued)
MAINTENANCE
Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first
× 1,000 km
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
104
112
120
128
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
# Months
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
Automatic transaxle fluid
(1)
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
R
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire condition & inflation pressure
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Wheel alignment
(5)
Inspect when abnormal condition noted
Tire rotation
Steering operation & linkage
Rotate the tires every 12,000 km
I
Power steering fluid & lines
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lock, hinges & hood latch
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
7 5
Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I - Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust or replace.
R - Replace or change
L - Lubricate.
(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual.
(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.
(3) Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the
operation.
(4) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:
a. Short-distance driving.
b. Driving on dusty roads.
c. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic.
(5) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.
* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.
7 6
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Owner maintenance schedule
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized Kia dealer at
the frequencies indicated to help ensure
safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reservoir.
WARNING - Radiation
coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns or
other serious injury.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
strange sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hardto-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the coolant
recovery reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
7 7
Maintenance
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system
before the warm weather season.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
7 8
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an
authorized Kia dealer with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the
separate Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any
servicing or maintenance procedure,
have it done by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Always remove all
loose or hanging clothing and all
jewelry before working on the
engine.
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 2.4L Gasoline Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Radiator cap
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Auto transaxle oil dipstick (if equipped)
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Power steering fluid reservoir
OMG077001
7 9
Maintenance
■ 2.7L Gasoline Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Radiator cap
8. Positive battery terminal
9. Auto transaxle oil dipstick (if equipped)
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Power steering fluid reservoir
OMG077002
7 10
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
OMG077003
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
OMG077004
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended Lubricants” later in
this section.)
✽ NOTICE
Although oil filters may have the same
external appearance, their internal
designs differ significantly. These filters
are not interchangeable. To avoid potential engine damage, use only the specified filter. Consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
7 11
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.
(Continued)
7 12
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing serious injury.
OMG075005
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, see an authorized
Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.
Maintenance
Engine coolant
• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in
the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Ambient
Temperature
Coolant
Solution
Water
5°F (-15°C)
35
65
-13°F (-25°C)
40
60
-31°F (-35°C)
50
50
-49°F (-45°C)
60
40
OMG075006
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam
may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.
7 13
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended Lubricants” later in
this section.)
OMG075007
Never mix different types of fluid.
Checking brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transaxle, brake fluid is used as clutch
fluid.
7 14
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
Do not allow brake fluid to contact the
vehicle's body paint, as paint damage
will result. Brake fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be thrown
out. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.
A few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in your brake/clutch system can damage brake/clutch system
parts.
Maintenance
DRIVE BELTS
POWER STEERING (IF EQUIPPED)
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent addition of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and replaced if necessary. At the same time, belts should be
examined for cracks, wear, fraying or
other evidence of deterioration and
replaced if necessary.
Belt routing should also be checked to be
sure there is no interference between the
belts and other parts of the engine.
If the belt is too loose, have it replaced by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the compressor drive
belt
Have the drive belts checked in accordance with the maintenance schedule.
✽ NOTICE
OMG075008
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reservoir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid, thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level.
• To avoid damage to the power steering pump, do not operate the vehicle
for prolonged periods with a low
power steering fluid level.
• Never start the engine when the reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Insufficient fluid can result in
increased steering effort; excessive
noise may also be present as the steering wheel is turned.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of the
power steering wheel and cause damage to it.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid.
(Refer
to
"Recommended
Lubricants" later in this section.)
Power steering hose
Check the hoses and hose connections
for leaks or damage before driving the
vehicle.
7 15
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Transaxle fluid
The transaxle fluid level should be
checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator,
radiator hose and exhaust system
etc., are very hot. Exercise great
care not to burn yourself during this
procedure.
OMG075009
Checking the automatic transaxle
fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following procedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm the engine is running at normal idle speed.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up sufficiently (fluid temperature 158~176°F
(70~80°C)), for example by 10 minutes
usual driving, shift the selector lever
through all positions then place the
selector lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
position.
7 16
OMG075010
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”
range on the level gauge. If the fluid
level is lower, add the specified fluid
from the fill hole. If the fluid level is
higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold condition (fluid temperature 68~86°F
(20~30°C) add the fluid to “COLD” line
and then recheck the fluid level
according to the above step 2.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes transaxle
slippage. Overfilling can cause
foaming, loss of fluid and
transaxle malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle, apply parking brake and
depress the brake pedal before
moving the shift lever.
“COLD” scale is for reference only
and should NOT be used to determine
transaxle fluid level.
Maintenance
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS
New automatic transaxle fluid should
be red. The red dye is added so the
assembly plant can identify it as automatic transaxle fluid and distinguish it
from engine oil or antifreeze. The red
dye, which is not an indicator of fluid
quality, is not permanent. As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle
fluid will begin to look darker. The
color may eventually appear light
brown.
✽ NOTICE
Have an Authorized Kia dealer inspect
or change the automatic transaxle fluid
according
to
the
Scheduled
Maintenance at the beginning of this
section.
Changing automatic transaxle
fluid
Have automatic transaxle fluid changed
by an authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.
Use only the specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
Lubricants" later in this section.)
OMG075011
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or it's occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
Body lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door hinges, hood hinges, and locks,
should be lubricated each time the
engine oil is changed. Use a non-freezing lubricant on locks during cold weather.
Make sure the engine hood secondary
latch keeps the hood from opening when
the primary latch is released.
7 17
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
✽ NOTICE
Do not drive with the air cleaner element removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
CAUTION - Air cleaner
Operating the engine without the air
cleaner may result in poor performance, emission control malfunction,
and/or engine damage.
OMG075012
Element cleaning
This element may be air cleaned or
replaced, depending on its condition.
Unless it is very dirty, merely shake it to
remove foreign particles. Each time this
filter is inspected, wipe the inside of the
air cleaner housing and cover with a
damp cloth. If the vehicle is operated in
extremely dusty or sandy areas, clean or
replace this element more often than at
the usual recommended intervals.
7 18
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Heater core
Evaporator
core
The climate control air filter should be
replaced every 15,000 km (10,000
miles). If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you try to replace
the air filter by owner maintenance,
replace it performing the following procedure, and in this case, be careful to avoid
damaging other components.
1LDA5047
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) are position is selected. If this
happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
7 19
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Wiper blade maintenance
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
✽ NOTICE
To prevent damage to the wiper blades,
do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or near
them.
7 20
Windshield wiper blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
✽ NOTICE
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, do not attempt to
move the wipers manually.
✽ NOTICE
The use of a non-specified wiper blade
could result in wiper malfunction and
failure.
1LDA5023
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
✽ NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may chip
or crack the windshield.
Maintenance
BATTERY
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
1JBA7037
Hydrogen, which is a highly
combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
1JBA7038
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If
possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or
cloth until medical attention
is received.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensation,
get medical attention immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
(Continued)
7 21
Maintenance
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to charge the battery when the battery cables are
connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
7 22
Battery recharging
OMG075021
For best battery service :
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the top of the battery clean and
dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 2030A for two hours.
Items to be reset after the battery has
been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Clock (See Chapter 3)
• Climate control system
(See Chapter 4)
• Audio (See Chapter 3)
• Sunroof (See Chapter 3)
Maintenance
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
✽ NOTICE
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last when
the battery is disconnected.
7 23
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
WARNING - Tire underin-
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked every day
when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”
means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
7 24
OMG055004N
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
flation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for protracted periods at high
speeds.
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
✽ NOTICE
• Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing,
install a new one as soon as possible.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and lead
to sudden tire failure. This could
result in loss of vehicle control
and potential injury.
WARNING - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
7 25
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7 26
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
Without a spare tire
CBGQ0707
Directional tires (if equipped)
CBGQ0707A
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only
from front to rear and not from
right to left.
WARNING
• Do not use the temporary
spare tire for tire rotation
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
Maintenance
Tread wear indicator
1LDA5026
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
Compact spare tire replacement (if equipped)
Wheel alignment and tire
balance
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new Kia and should be mounted on
the same compact spare tire wheel.
The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
✽ NOTICE
Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels.
Use only approved wheel weights.
7 27
Maintenance
WARNING - Replacing
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and traction.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
7 28
(Continued)
If you nevertheless decide to
equip your vehicle with any
tire/wheel combination not
recommended by Kia for off
road driving, you should not
use these tires for highway
driving.
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that is
not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, snow
chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Maintenance
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignement.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
Tire sidewall labeling
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possiblity of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information
on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the
fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be
used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/60R16 92H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 29
Maintenance
92 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 30
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's
designed maximum safe operating
speed.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years, based
on the manufacturing date, tire
strength and performance, decline
with age naturally (even unused
spare tires). Therefore, the tires
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1605 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2005.
Maintenance
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden tire
failure, which could lead to a
loss of control and an accident
involving serious injury or death.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
The following information relates to
the tire grading system developed by
the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Stardard (CMVSS) for grading tires
by tread wear, traction and temperature performance.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. However, performance
may differ from the norm because of
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on Kia vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
7 31
Maintenance
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. The
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C. The grades represent the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tires to
degenerate and reduce tires life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tires failure. Grades A and B
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by the law.
7 32
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per
square inch (psi) before a tire has
built up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
7 33
Maintenance
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
7 34
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
That load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions. Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa
(4 psi) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Maintenance
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended lubricants
Recommended SAE viscosity number
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and
durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in
improved fuel economy.
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available.
Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel
economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to
measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer
significant cost and energy savings.
Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your
vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil *¹
Manual transaxle fluid
Classification
API Service SJ, SL or above,
ILSAC GF-3 or above
API Service GL-4
(SAE 75W-85, fill-for-life)
Automatic transaxle fluid DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III
Power steering fluid
PSF-IV
Brake/Clutch fluid
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
*¹ Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers.
✽ NOTICE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy
and cold weather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are
required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of
any viscosity other than those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your
vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed
to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature
-10
0
20 40 60 80 100 120
(°F)
20W-50
Engine Oil *
1
15W-40
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity
grade SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3).
7 35
Maintenance
EXTERIOR CARE
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each offroad trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
7 36
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
✽ NOTICE
Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
OJB037800
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure
water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
✽ NOTICE
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with
a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing
highly alkaline or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized aluminum
parts. This may result in damage to
the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Underbody maintenance
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
7 37
Maintenance
INTERIOR CARE
Aluminum wheel maintenance
Interior general precautions
The aluminum wheels are coated with a
clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum wheels. They
may scratch or damage the finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any acid detergent. It may
damage and corrode the aluminum
wheels coated with a clear protective
finish.
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting
the dashboard because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do contact the dashboard, wipe them off immediately. See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
✽ NOTICE
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
✽ NOTICE
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect the
fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant
properties.
7 38
Maintenance
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
✽ NOTICE
Do not scrape or scratch the inside of
the rear window. This may result in
damage to the rear window defroster
grid.
7 39
Specifications / 8-2
Specifications
8
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications given here are for general information only. Although this information was accurate at the time of printing, Kia
reserves the right to change its vehicles or their specifications without notice. Please check with an authorized Kia dealer for more
precise and more up-to-date information.
Dimensions
Item
mm (in)
Overall length
4,735 (186.4)
Overall width
1,805 (71.1)
Overall height
1,480 (58.3)
Front tread
1563 (61.5)
Rear tread
1,552 (61.1)
Wheelbase
2,720 (107.1)
Tires
Recommended Cold Tire
Item
Inflation Pressure
Tire
Wheel
kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)
P205/60R16
6.5J×16
210 (30)
9~11 (65~79, 88~107)
P215/50R17
6.5J×17
220 (32)
9~11 (65~79, 88~107)
420 (60)
9~11 (65~79, 88~107)
Compact spare tire
T125/80D16
8 2
Specifications
Engine
Item
2.4L Engine
2.7L Engine
BoreXStroke
88mm x 97 mm (3. 46 in x 3. 82 in.)
86.7 mm X 75 mm (3.41 in X 2.95 in)
Displacement
2359 cc (143. 90 cu. in)
2656 cc (1621 cu.in)
10. 5 : 1
10. 4 : 1
Compression Ratio
Electrical system
Item
Battery
Generator
Starter
Spark
Plug
Gap
Spec. Iridium coated
2.4L Engine
2.7L Engine
12V / 68AH (20HR)
12V / 68AH (20HR)
13.5V / 110A
13.5V / 130A
12V-1.2kW
12V-1.2kW
1.0 mm ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in) 1.0 mm ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in)
SK16PR-A11
ILFR5B-11
Weights
Refer to the compliance label describing GVWR & GAWR weights attached to your vehicle.
(see page 5-15, Label information)
8 3
Specifications
Capacities
Lubricant
Engine oil
Volume
*1
(with filter change)
2.4L Engine
2.7L Engine
Classification
4.3 l (4.5 US qt.)
API Service SJ, SL or above,
4.5 l (4.7 US qt.)
ILSAC GF-3 or above
Manual transaxle fluid
1.9 l (2.0 US qt.)
API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)
Automatic transaxle fluid
9.5 l (10.0 US qt.)
DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III
0.8 l ( 0.8 US qt.)
PSF-IV
Power steering
Coolant
Brake/Clutch fluid
Fuel
*1
2.4L Engine
6.4~6.9 l (6.8~7.3 US qt.)
2.7L Engine
8.2~8.3 l (8.7~8.8 US qt.)
0.7~0.8 l (0.7~0.8 US qt.)
62 l (16.4 US gal)
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers in chapter 7.
8 4
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Unleaded gasoline with AKI 87 or higher
Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulb
Headlights (Low)
Headlights (High)
Front turn signal lights
Position lights
Side marker (if equipped)
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Stop and tail lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
High mounted stop light (if equipped)
License plate lights
Front map lamp
Center dome lamp
Trunk room lamp
Door courtesy lamps (if equipped)
Foot lamp
Vanity mirror lamps
Wattage
55
55
21
5
5
51
21/5
21
18
18
5
10
10
5
5
5
5
Bulb No.
H7 or H11B*
H1*
* : if equipped
8 5
Index
9
Index
A
E
Air bags-supplemental restraint system ····················3-48
Air cleaner ····································································7-18
Antenna·········································································3-93
Audio remote control···················································3-94
Audio system ································································3-95
Automatic climate control···········································4-55
Automatic transaxle ·············································4-6, 7-16
Electrical circuit protection ··········································6-6
Electronic stability control··········································4-21
Emergency starting························································6-3
Emission control system ················································5-2
Engine compartment··············································2-4, 7-9
Engine cooling system ·················································7-12
Engine oil ······································································7-11
Exterior care·································································7-36
B
Battery···········································································7-21
Before driving·································································5-4
Brake fluid····································································7-14
Brake system ································································4-10
C
F
Fuel filler lid ·································································3-72
Fuel requirements ··························································5-2
G
Gauges···········································································4-25
Climate control air filter ·············································7-19
Compass - Z-Nav™ compass······································4-36
Cruise control system ··················································4-18
H
D
Hazard warning flasher ··············································4-47
Homelink® wireless control system ···························3-79
Hood ··············································································3-71
How to use this manual ·················································1-2
Defroster ·······································································4-46
Door locks ·····································································3-10
Drive belts·····································································7-15
9 2
Index
I
O
If you have a flat tire ···················································6-18
Ignition switch································································4-2
Immobilizer system························································3-8
Instrument cluster ·······················································4-24
Instrument panel overview ···········································2-3
Interior care··································································7-38
Interior features ···························································3-86
Interior lights ·······························································3-83
Interior overview····························································2-2
Overheating ····································································6-2
Overloading ··································································5-14
Owner maintenance·······················································7-7
K
Keys ·················································································3-2
L
Label information ························································5-15
Lighting·········································································4-40
Lubricant specifications ··············································7-35
Lubricants and fluids ··················································7-17
Luggage net ··································································3-92
M
Maintenance schedule ···················································7-3
Maintenance services·····················································7-2
Manual climate control system···································4-48
Manual transaxle ···························································4-4
Mirrors··········································································3-75
P
Power steering ······························································7-15
R
Rear parking assist system··········································4-46
Remote keyless entry ·····················································3-4
Road warning ·································································6-2
S
Safety belts····································································3-28
Seat ················································································3-18
Special driving conditions ·············································5-6
Specifications··································································8-2
Starting the engine ·························································4-3
Steering wheel·······························································4-16
Storage compartment ··················································3-84
Suggestions for economical operation··························5-5
Sunroof··········································································3-90
9 3
Index
T
Theft-alarm system························································3-6
Tires and wheels···························································7-24
Towing···········································································6-13
Trailer towing ·································································5-9
Trunk·············································································3-69
V
Vehicle break-in process················································1-2
W
Warnings and indicators ·············································4-30
Window ·········································································3-14
Windshield defrosting and defogging ························4-63
Wiper blades·································································7-20
Wipers and washers·····················································4-43
9 4
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement